Powerflex 700s PDF

PowerFlex® 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive /
PowerFlex® 700S High Performance AC Drive
INSTALLATION MANUAL
Frames 9 - 14
Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of
electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the Application,
Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-1.1
available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http://
www.rockwellautomation.com/literature) describes some important differences
between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices.
Because of this difference, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid
state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must
satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is
acceptable.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect
or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this
equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative
purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any
particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility
or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use
of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without
written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc. is prohibited.
Throughout this manual, when necessary we use notes to make you aware of
safety considerations.
WARNING: Identifies information about practices or

! circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous
environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss.
Important: Identifies information that is critical for successful application and

understanding of the product.
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or

! circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard,
avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequences.
Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment

(e.g., drive or motor) to alert people that dangerous voltage may be
present.
Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment

(e.g., drive or motor) to alert people that surfaces may be at
dangerous temperatures.
PowerFlex, DriveExplorer, DriveTools SP, DPI, and SCANport are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Klixon® is a registered trademark of Sensata Technologies, Inc.
Summary of Changes
Manual Updates The information below summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 700H and
700S Installation Instructions, publication PFLEX-IN006, since the March
2006 release.
Change Page
Updated the Normal Duty power ratings Preface-1
Updated the Reference Materials List Preface-1
Added information on installations using single-phase input power 1-2
Updated the Common Bus/Precharge information 1-9
Added a description for the use of output reactors on frame 14 drives 1-2
Updated the 700H I/O board options chart 2-2
Updated the “Auto/Manual Notes” section to include information on enabling manual 2-12
mode to allow starts and jogs from the HIM in 2-wire mode
Added a note to the analog inputs on the 700S Phase II control 4-4
Added terminal wiring illustration for external brake resistor and external brake IGBT 6-6
and resistor connections on frame 9 drives
Updated all Frame 10 dimension drawings to include cable routing information. 7-1 - 7-5
Added a dimension drawing for the frame 10 Motor Control Center (MCC), Enclosure 7-4
Codes “B” and “K”
Updated the instructions for frame 10 Ungrounded, High Resistive Ground or Grounded 7-9
B Phase Delta installations
Updated the Power Terminal Block designations for frame 10 (removed brake option 7-14
terminals)
Updated the frame 13 dimensions for the NEMA/UL Type 12 - IP54 Enclosures 10-4
Added Chapter 11 - Frame 14 Installation 11-1
Updated the Agency Certification information for drives with 700H control A-1
Separated the drive ratings information from the drive protection devices - now in A-5,
separate tables A-13
Updated the drive rating, fusing and circuit breaker specifications A-13
Added new Appendix B to consolidate the common lifting and mounting instructions B-1
Added the Allen-Bradley 842HR rotary encoder to the list of compatible encoders C-1
Updated wiring diagrams for the Hi-Resolution Encoder C-2
Updated wiring diagrams for Resolvers D-3
Updated wiring diagrams for the MDI board E-3
Added Appendix E on ATEX Approved PowerFlex 700H Drives in Group II Category (2) F-1
Applications with ATEX Approved Motors
ii Summary of Changes
The information below summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 700H and
700S Installation Instructions, publication PFLEX-IN006, since the
October, 2004 release.
Change Page
Updated the drive ratings for PowerFlex 700H and 700S Preface-1
Updated the information on installing unbalanced, ungrounded or resistive grounded 1-1
distribution systems
Added information on DC input precharge control wiring 1-10
Updated the “Control Board Slot Designations” table for the new 20C-DG1 digital I/O 2-2
option board
Added drive catalog numbers for 700H control I/O board options 2-2
Updated the “Analog Input, PTC 0-10V Input” wiring example 2-8
Added Chapter 4, “Control Wiring for PowerFlex 700S Drives with Series II Control” 4-1
Updated information on frame 9 operating temperatures 6-2
Updated frame 9 installation instructions for unbalanced, ungrounded or resistive 6-4
grounded distribution systems
Updated frame 10 minimum mounting clearances 7-1
Updated frame 10 operating temperatures 7-2
Added dimensions drawing for frame 10 NEMA/UL Type 12 - IP54 Enclosure 7-5
Updated frame 10 “Moving Control Frame” to show slotted holes in Control Frame 7-6
Updated frame 10 “Removing Protective Covers” to omit screws that were not present. 7-8
Updated frame 11 minimum mounting clearances 8-1
Updated frame 11 operating temperatures 8-2
Added dimensions drawing for frame 11 NEMA/UL Type 12 - IP54 Enclosure 8-5
Added Chapter 9, “Frame 12 Installation” 9-1
Added Chapter 10, “Frame 13 Installation” 10-1
Updated the agency certifications A-1
Updated the drive protection specifications A-1
Updated the fusing and circuit breaker specifications A-13, A-13
Added specifications and wiring diagram for using the Stahltronic linear encoder E-3
Table of Contents
Important User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Summary of Manual Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-i

Changes
Preface Overview
Drive Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
Enclosure Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
Who Should Use this Manual? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2
What Is Not in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2
Reference Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2
Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-3
Drive Frame Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-4
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-5
Chapter 1 General Installation Information

AC Supply Source Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
General Grounding Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Power Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
EMC Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Using Input/Output Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Common Bus/Precharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Chapter 2 PowerFlex® 700H Control Wiring

Reference Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Auto/Manual Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Chapter 3 Control Wiring for PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase I Control
I/O Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Hardware Enable Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Auxiliary Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Main Control Board I/O and Encoder Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Connecting SynchLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Chapter 4 Control Wiring for PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase II Control
I/O Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
I/O Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
I/O Wiring Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Hard Enable Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Auxiliary Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Chapter 5 Communication Options

Communication Module Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Communication Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
ii
Chapter 6 Frame 9 Installation

Minimum Mounting Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Operating Temperatures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Nameplate Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Lifting and Mounting Frame 9 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Removing the Protective Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Ungrounded, Unbalanced or High Resistive Ground Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Routing for I/O Wiring and Communication Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Lifting and Mounting Frame 10 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Ungrounded, High Resistive Ground or Grounded B Phase Delta Installations . . . . . . . . 7-9
Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Minimum Mounting Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Operating Temperatures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Lifting and Mounting Frame 13 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Ungrounded, High Resistive Ground or Grounded B Phase Delta Installations . . . . . . . 10-5
Removing the Protective Covers from the Converter Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Removing the Protective Covers from the Inverter Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
iii

Minimum Mounting Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Operating Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Lifting and Mounting Frame 14 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Ungrounded, High Resistive Ground or Grounded B Phase Delta Installations. . . . . . . 11-9
Removing the Protective Covers from the Converter Unit(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Power Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Removing the Protective Covers from the Inverter Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Frame 14 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Appendix A Specifications
Drive Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Drive Fuse & Circuit Breaker Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Appendix B Lifting and Mounting Instructions

Lifting Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Appendix C PowerFlex 700S Hi-Resolution (Stegmann) Encoder Feedback Option

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Wiring the Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card to an Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Appendix D PowerFlex 700S Resolver Feedback Option Card

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Wiring the Resolver Feedback Option Card to a Resolver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Appendix E PowerFlex 700S Multi-Device Interface Option Card

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Wiring the MDI Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Appendix F Instructions for ATEX Approved PowerFlex 700H Drives in Group II Category (2) Appli-
cations with ATEX Approved Motors
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Motor Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Drive Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4
Removing the 20C-DG1 Option Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
Verify Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
Index
iv
Preface
Overview
Drive Description Frame 9 - 14 PowerFlex® 700H and 700S AC drives are available in the
following normal duty power ratings.
Drive AC Input Range HP Range kW Range
700H 380-500V 200-2300 132-1600
525-690V 150-2400 160-2000
700S 380-500V 200-1250 132-800
525-690V 150-1600 160-1500
The 700H features a parameter set modeled after the PowerFlex 700 AC
drive. Standard I/O includes either 24V or 115V digital I/O plus analog I/O
NetLinx™ communication options, including DeviceNet™, ControlNet™
and EtherNet/IP networks.
The PowerFlex 700S offers optimized integration for the most demanding
drive control and drive system applications. Available with embedded
high-performance Logix engine (DriveLogix) to produce a highly
functional, cost-effective drive and control solution.
Enclosure Options The following enclosure types are available for PowerFlex 700H and 700S
drives:
Enclosure
Drive Code Enclosure Type NEMA/UL Rating Description
700H A Rittal TS 8 IP21, NEMA/UL Type 1 Single Door - Freestanding,
Modular Light Grey (RAL 7035)
B MCC Style IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1 Single Door - Freestanding,
Roll-in, Roll-out power
structure
H Rittal TS 8 IP54, NEMA/UL Type 12(1) Single Door - Freestanding,
Modular Filters in Door and Roof Vent
J No enclosure IP00, NEMA/UL Type Open With Conformal Coated
Circuit Boards
K MCC Style IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1 Single Door - Freestanding,
structure, with Conformal
Coated Circuit Boards
M Rittal TS 8 IP21, NEMA/UL Type 1 Single Door - Freestanding,
Modular Light Grey (RAL 7035), with
Conformal Coated Circuit
Boards
N No enclosure IP00, NEMA/UL Type Open –
W Rittal TS 8 IP54, NEMA/UL Type 12 Single Door - Freestanding,
Modular w/ Filters in Door and Roof Vent
Conformal Coat
p-2 Overview
Enclosure
Drive Code Enclosure Type NEMA/UL Rating Description
700S A Rittal TS 8 IP21, NEMA/UL Type 1 Single Door - Freestanding,
Modular Light Grey (RAL 7035)
B MCC Style IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1 Single Door - Freestanding,
structure
N No enclosure IP00, NEMA/UL Type Open –
(1)
For replacement filters, refer to the PowerFlex Architecture Class Spare Parts & Options list available at:
http://www.ab.com/support/abdrives/powerflex70/PF7ReleasedParts.pdf
Who Should Use this This manual is intended for qualified personnel. You must be able to mount
Manual? and wire Adjustable Frequency AC Drive devices.
What Is Not in this Manual This manual is designed to provide drive mounting and wiring information.
For start-up, programming and troubleshooting information, refer to the
appropriate manual listed below.
Reference Materials Allen-Bradley publications are available on the internet at

www.rockwellautomation.com/literature.
The following manuals are recommended for general drive information:

Title Publication
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 1770-4.1
Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for pulse Width Modulated AC DRIVES-IN001…
Drives
Preventive Maintenance of Industrial Control and Drive System DRIVES-TD001…
Equipment
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance SGI-1.1
of Solid State Control
A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams 100-2.10
Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-4.5.2
The following manuals are recommended for detailed PowerFlex 700H

information:
Title Publication
PowerFlex Reference Manual PFLEX-RM001…
PowerFlex 700H Programming Manual 20C-PM001…
The following manuals are recommended for detailed PowerFlex 700S

information:
Title Publication
PowerFlex 700S with Phase I Control Reference Manual PFLEX-RM002…
PowerFlex 700S with Phase II Control Reference Manual PFLEX-RM003…
PowerFlex 700S with Phase I Control User Manual 20D-UM001…
PowerFlex 700S with Phase II Control User Manual 20D-UM006…
Overview p-3
The following manuals are recommended for detailed installation and

service information for PowerFlex 700H and 700S drives:
Title Publication
Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700H/S IP00 Open Pwr Structure - Frm 10-13 PFLEX-IN020…
Hardware Service Manual - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives (Frame 9) PFLEX-TG001…
Hardware Service Manual - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives (Frame 14) (not yet available)
For Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support:

Title Online at . . .
Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support www.ab.com/support/abdrives
Manual Conventions • In this manual we refer to the PowerFlex 700H or 700S Adjustable
Frequency AC Drive as:
– drive
– PowerFlex 700H
– 700H
– PowerFlex 700S
– 700S
• To help differentiate parameter names and LCD display text from other
text, the following conventions will be used:
– Parameter Names will appear in [brackets].

For example: [DC Bus Voltage].
– Display Text will appear in “quotes.” For example: “Enabled.”
• The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an

action:
Word Meaning
Can Possible, able to do something
Cannot Not possible, not able to do
something
May Permitted, allowed
Must Unavoidable, you must do this
Shall Required and necessary
Should Recommended
Should Not Not recommended
p-4 Overview
Drive Frame Sizes Similar PowerFlex 700H and 700S drive sizes are grouped into frame sizes
to simplify spare parts ordering, dimensioning, etc. A cross reference of
drive catalog numbers and their respective frame size is provided in
Appendix A.
Identifying the Frame Size of the Drive

Determine the frame size of your drive by checking the data nameplate on
the Control Frame. The frame number is printed just above the serial
number.
X50
Cat No. 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN

UL Open Type/IP00
540V 650V Series: A
Standard I/O: NONE
Normal Duty Power 160 kW 250 kW Original Firmware No. 2.04
Heavy Duty Power 132 kW 200 kW
Input: DC, C UL
Æ US
DC Voltage Range 462 - 594 583 - 713 LISTED
Amps 350 350 IND CONT EQ
9D42
Cat No. 20D
UL Open Type/IP00
Normal Duty Power

Heavy Duty Power
J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN
540V
160 kW
132 kW
650V
250 kW
200 kW
Series: A
Standard I/O: NONE
Original Firmware No. 2.04
UL
Output: 3 Phase, 0 - 320Hz
AC Voltage Range
Input: DC, C Æ US
DC Voltage Range 462 - 594 583 - 713
0 - 400 0 - 460
LISTED
Amps 350 350 IND CONT EQ
9D42
Output: 3 Phase, 0 - 320Hz
AC Voltage Range 0 - 400 0 - 460
Base Hz (default) 50 Hz 60 Hz
Continuous Amps 300/245 300/245
1 Min Overload Amps 330/368 330/368
2 Sec Overload Amps 450/490 450/490
MFD. in 1989 on Nov 9 Frame #: 9
Serial Number: 2622381652
2622381652
Base Hz (default)
MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B)
50 Hz 60 Hz
Continuous Amps 300/245 300/245
1 Min Overload Amps 330/368 330/368
2 Sec Overload Amps 450/490 450/490
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 MFD. in 2006 on Nov 9 Frame #: 9
Serial Number: 2622381652
MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B) 2622381652

Frame Number
Overview p-5
General Precautions
ATTENTION: This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic
! Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies. Static control
precautions are required when installing, testing, servicing or
repairing this assembly. Component damage may result if ESD
control procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar with
static control procedures, reference A-B publication 8000-4.5.2,
“Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage” or any other
applicable ESD protection handbook.
ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed drive can
! result in component damage or a reduction in product life.
Wiring or application errors, such as, undersizing the motor,
incorrect or inadequate AC supply, or excessive ambient
temperatures may result in malfunction of the system.
ATTENTION: Only qualified personnel familiar with
! adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should
plan or implement the installation, start-up and subsequent
maintenance of the system. Failure to comply may result in
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
ATTENTION: To avoid an electric shock hazard, verify that the
! voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged completely before
servicing. Check the DC bus voltage at the Power Terminal
Block by measuring between the +DC and -DC terminals,
between the +DC terminal and the chassis, and between the -DC
terminal and the chassis. The voltage must be zero for all three
measurements.
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. DPI
! host products must not be directly connected together via 1202
cables. Unpredictable behavior can result if two or more devices
are connected in this manner.
ATTENTION: The sheet metal cover and mounting screws on
! the ASIC Board located on the power structure are energized at
(-) DC bus potential high voltage. Risk of electrical shock, injury,
or death exists if someone comes in contact with the assembly.
p-6 Overview
ATTENTION: The “adjust freq” portion of the bus regulator

! function is extremely useful for preventing nuisance overvoltage
faults resulting from aggressive decelerations, overhauling loads,
and eccentric loads. It forces the output frequency to be greater
than commanded frequency while the drive's bus voltage is
increasing towards levels that would otherwise cause a fault.
However, it can also cause either of the following two conditions
to occur.
1. Fast positive changes in input voltage can cause
uncommanded positive speed changes.
A. PowerFlex 700H An “OverSpeed Limit” fault will occur if
the speed reaches [Maximum Speed] + [Overspeed Limit].
If this condition is unacceptable, action should be taken to
1) limit supply voltages within the specification of the
drive and, 2) limit fast positive input voltage changes to
less than 10%. Without taking such actions, if this
operation is unacceptable, the “adjust freq” portion of the
bus regulator function must be disabled (see parameters
161 and 162).
B. PowerFlex 700S An “Abs Overspd Det” fault will occur if
the speed reaches [Rev Speed Limit] - [Abs OverSpd Lim]
or [Fwd Speed Limit] + [Abs OverSpd Lim]. If this
condition is unacceptable, action should be taken to 1)
limit supply voltages within the specification of the drive
and, 2) limit fast positive input voltage changes. Without
taking such actions, if this operation is unacceptable,
disable the bus regulator by setting parameter 414 [Brake/
Bus Cnfg], bit 3 “Bus Reg En” to zero (0).
2. Actual deceleration times can be longer than commanded
deceleration times.
A. PowerFlex 700H A “Decel Inhibit” fault is generated if the
drive stops decelerating altogether. If this condition is
unacceptable, the “adjust freq” portion of the bus regulator
must be disabled (see parameters 161 and 162). The
“Decel Inhibit” fault can be disabled by setting parameter
238 [Fault Config 1] bit 6 “Decel Inhib” to zero (0).
B. PowerFlex 700S A “Vref Decel Fail” fault is generated if
the drive stops decelerating altogether. If this operation is
unacceptable, disable the bus regulator by setting
parameter 414 [Brake/Bus Cnfg], bit 3 “Bus Reg En” to
zero (0). This fault cannot be disabled in the PowerFlex
700S.
Note: For both drives, installing a properly sized dynamic
brake resistor or external dynamic brake will provide equal or
better performance in most cases.
Important: These faults are not instantaneous. Test results
show they can take 2-12 seconds to occur.
Chapter 1
General Installation Information
AC Supply Source Frame 9 - 14 PowerFlex 700H and 700S drives are suitable for use on a
Considerations circuit capable of delivering up to a maximum of 200,000 rms symmetrical
amperes, and a maximum of 690 volts.
ATTENTION: To guard against personal injury and/or

! equipment damage caused by improper fusing or circuit breaker
selection, use only the recommended line fuses/circuit breakers
specified in Appendix A.
If a system ground fault monitor (RCD) is to be used, only Type B

(adjustable) devices should be used to avoid nuisance tripping.
Unbalanced, Ungrounded or Resistive Grounded Distribution Systems

If phase to ground voltage will exceed 125% of normal or the supply system
is ungrounded, refer to Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width
Modulated (PWM) AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001…, for more
information.
ATTENTION: PowerFlex 700H and 700S drives contain

! protective MOVs and common mode capacitors that are
referenced to ground. These devices must be disconnected if the
drive is installed on a resistive grounded distribution system or an
ungrounded distribution system.
If you are
installing a... refer to:
Frame 9 drive Ungrounded, Unbalanced or High Resistive Ground Installations on page 6-4
Frame 10 drive Ungrounded, High Resistive Ground or Grounded B Phase Delta Installations on
page 7-9
page 8-9
page 9-9
page 10-5
page 11-9
1-2 General Installation Information
Single-Phase Input Power

The PowerFlex 700H and 700S drives are typically used with a three-phase
input supply. The drives have been listed by UL to operate on single-phase
input power with the requirement that the output current is derated by 80%
of the three-phase ratings identified on pages A-5 to A-13.
Input Power Conditioning

All AC input drives include an internal line reactor.
Certain events on the power system supplying a drive can cause component
damage or shortened product life. These conditions are:
• The power system has power factor correction capacitors switched in and
out of the system, either by the user or by the power company.
• The power source has intermittent voltage spikes in excess of 6000 volts.
These spikes could be caused by other equipment on the line or by events
such as lightning strikes.
• The power source has frequent interruptions.
If any or all of these conditions exist, it is recommended that the user install
a minimum amount of impedance between the drive and the source. This
impedance could come from the supply transformer itself, the cable
between the transformer and drive or an additional transformer or reactor.
The impedance can be calculated using the information supplied in the
Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC
Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001…
Output Power Conditioning

Frame 14 drives can be ordered with or without output reactors (du/dt
filters). The du/dt filter limits the rate of change of output voltage and the
rate of change in the IGBT or output transistor switching event.
Refer to the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated
(PWM) AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001…, for minimum
inductance on installations where du/dt filters are not installed.
General Installation Information 1-3
General Grounding Safety Ground - PE

Requirements
The drive Safety Ground - PE must be connected to system ground.
Ground impedance must conform to the requirements of national and local
industrial safety regulations and/or electrical codes. The integrity of all
ground connections should be periodically checked.
For installations within a cabinet, a single safety ground point or ground bus
bar connected directly to building steel should be used. All circuits
including the AC input ground conductor should be grounded
independently and directly to this point/bar.
Table 1.A Typical Grounding
U (T1)
R (L1) V (T2)
S (L2) W (T3)
T (L3)
PE
SHLD
Shield Termination - SHLD

The Shield terminal provides a grounding point for the motor cable shield.
It must be connected to an earth ground by a separate continuous lead. The
motor cable shield should be connected to this terminal on the drive (drive
end) and the motor frame (motor end). A shield terminating cable gland
may also be used.
When shielded cable is used for control and signal wiring, the shield
should be grounded at the source end only, not at the drive end.
RFI Filter Grounding

Using an optional RFI filter may result in relatively high ground leakage
currents. Therefore, the filter must only be used in installations with
grounded AC supply systems and be permanently installed and solidly
grounded (bonded) to the building power distribution ground. Ensure that
the incoming supply neutral is solidly connected (bonded) to the same
building power distribution ground. Grounding must not rely on flexible
cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit
inadvertent disconnection. Some local codes may require redundant ground
connections. The integrity of all connections should be periodically
checked. Refer to the instructions supplied with the filter.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers Frame 9 - 14 drives can be installed with either input fuses or an input
circuit breaker. National and local industrial safety regulations and/or
electrical codes may determine additional requirements for these
installations. Refer to Appendix A for recommended fuses/circuit breakers.
ATTENTION: Frame 9 - 14 PowerFlex drives do not provide

! branch short circuit protection. Specifications for recommended
fuses to provide protection against short circuits are provided in
Appendix A.
Power Wiring
ATTENTION: National Codes and standards (NEC, VDE, BSI
! etc.) and local codes outline provisions for safely installing
electrical equipment. Installation must comply with
specifications regarding wire types, conductor sizes, branch
circuit protection and disconnect devices. Failure to do so may
result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.
If you are installing... refer to:

a Frame 9 drive Power Wiring on page 6-5
Cable Types Acceptable for 200-690 Volt Installations

A variety of cable types are acceptable for drive installations. For many
installations, unshielded cable is adequate, provided it can be separated
from sensitive circuits. As an approximate guide, allow a spacing of 0.3
meters (1 foot) for every 10 meters (32.8 feet) of length. In all cases, long
parallel runs must be avoided. Do not use cable with an insulation thickness
less than or equal to 15 mils (0.4mm/0.015 in.). Use Copper wire only. Wire
gauge requirements and recommendations are based on 75° C. Do not
reduce wire gauge when using higher temperature wire.
Unshielded Cable
THHN, THWN or similar wire is acceptable for drive installation in dry
environments provided adequate free air space and/or conduit fill rates
limits are provided. Do not use THHN or similarly coated wire in wet
areas. Any wire chosen must have a minimum insulation thickness of 15
mils and should not have large variations in insulation concentricity.
Shielded Cable
Shielded cable contains all of the general benefits of multi-conductor cable
with the added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much of
the noise generated by a typical AC drive. Strong consideration for shielded
cable should be given in installations with sensitive equipment such as
weigh scales, capacitive proximity switches and other devices that may be
affected by electrical noise in the distribution system. Applications with
large numbers of drives in a similar location, imposed EMC regulations or a
high degree of communications/ networking are also good candidates for
shielded cable.
Shielded cable may also help reduce shaft voltage and induced bearing
currents for some applications. In addition, the increased impedance of
shielded cable may help extend the distance that the motor can be located
from the drive without the addition of motor protective devices such as
terminator networks. Refer to Chapter 5, “Reflected Wave” in Wiring and
Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001…
for more information.
Consideration should be given to all of the general specifications dictated by

the environment of the installation, including temperature, flexibility,
moisture characteristics and chemical resistance. In addition, a braided
shield should be included and be specified by the cable manufacturer as
having coverage of at least 75%. An additional foil shield can greatly
improve noise containment.
A good example of recommended cable is Belden® 295xx (xx determines

gauge). This cable has four (4) XLPE insulated conductors with a 100%
coverage foil and an 85% coverage copper braided shield (with drain wire)
surrounded by a PVC jacket.
Other types of shielded cable are available, but the selection of these types
may limit the allowable cable length. Particularly, some of the newer cables
twist 4 conductors of THHN wire and wrap them tightly with a foil shield.
This construction can greatly increase the cable charging current required
and reduce the overall drive performance. Unless specified in the individual
distance tables as tested with the drive, these cables are not recommended
and their performance against the lead length limits supplied is not known.
Armored Cable
Cable with continuous aluminum armor is often recommended in drive
system applications or specific industries. It offers most of the advantages
of standard shielded cable and also combines considerable mechanical
strength and resistance to moisture. It can be installed in concealed and
exposed manners and removes the requirement for conduit (EMT) in the
installation. It can also be directly buried or embedded in concrete.
Because noise containment can be affected by incidental grounding of the

armor to building steel when the cable is mounted, it is recommended the
armored cable have an overall PVC jacket (see Chapter 2, “Wire Types,” of
Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC

Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001…).
Interlocked armor is acceptable for shorter cable runs, but continuous

welded armor is preferred.
Best performance is achieved with three spaced ground conductors, but

acceptable performance below 200 HP is provided via a single ground
conductor.
Table 1.B Recommended Shielded / Armored Cable
Location Rating/Type Description
Standard 600V, 90° C (194° F) • Four tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation.
(Option 1) XHHW2/RHW-2 • Copper braid/aluminum foil combination shield and
Anixter B209500-B209507, tinned copper drain wire.
Belden 29501-29507, or • PVC jacket.
equivalent
Standard Tray rated 600V, 90° C (194° • Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation.
(Option 2) F) RHH/RHW-2 • 5 mil single helical copper tape (25% overlap min.) with
Anixter OLF-7xxxxx or three bare copper grounds in contact with shield.
equivalent • PVC jacket.
Class I & II; Tray rated 600V, 90° C (194° • Three bare copper conductors with XLPE insulation
Division I & II F) RHH/RHW-2 and impervious corrugated continuously welded
Anixter 7V-7xxxx-3G or aluminum armor.
equivalent • Black sunlight resistant PVC jacket overall.
• Three copper grounds on #10 AWG and smaller.
EMC Compliance
Refer to EMC Instructions for details.
CabIe Trays and Conduit

If cable trays or large conduits are to be used, refer to guidelines presented
in publication DRIVES-IN001… , Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for
Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives.
ATTENTION: To avoid a possible shock hazard caused by

! induced voltages, unused wires in the conduit must be grounded
at both ends. For the same reason, if a drive sharing a conduit is
being serviced or installed, all drives using this conduit should be
disabled. This will help minimize the possible shock hazard from
“cross coupled” motor leads.
EMC Instructions CE Conformity

Conformity with the Low Voltage (LV) Directive and Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Directive has been demonstrated using harmonized
European Norm (EN) standards published in the Official Journal of the
European Communities. PowerFlex Drives comply with the EN standards
listed below when installed according to this manual.
CE Declarations of Conformity are available online at:

http://www.ab.com/certification/ce/docs.
Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC)

• EN50178 Electronic equipment for use in power installations.
EMC Directive (89/336/EEC)

• EN61800-3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3:
EMC product standard including specific test methods.
General Notes
• The motor cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid
electromagnetic emission as well as capacitive currents.
• Use of line filters in ungrounded systems is not recommended.
• PowerFlex drives may cause radio frequency interference if used in a
residential or domestic environment. The user is required to take
measures to prevent interference, in addition to the essential
requirements for CE compliance listed below, if necessary.
• Conformity of the drive with CE EMC requirements does not guarantee
an entire machine or installation complies with CE EMC requirements.
Many factors can influence total machine/installation compliance.
• PowerFlex drives can generate conducted low frequency disturbances
(harmonic emissions) on the AC supply system.
Essential Requirements for CE Compliance

Conditions 1-6 listed below must be satisfied for PowerFlex drives to meet
the requirements of EN61800-3.
1. Standard PowerFlex 700H or 700S CE compatible Drive. For Frames 10

and up, the drive must also be installed in a suitable Rittal TS 8 (or
equivalent) enclosure.
2. Review important precautions/attention statements throughout this
manual before installing the drive.
3. Grounding as described on page 1-3.
4. Output power, control (I/O) and signal wiring must be braided, shielded
cable with a coverage of 75% or better, metal conduit or equivalent
attenuation.
5. All shielded cables should terminate with the proper shielded connector.
6. Conditions in Table 1.C.
Table 1.C PowerFlex EN61800-3 EMC Compatibility
Second Environment
Frame
Restrict Motor Cable to 30 m (98 ft.)

Any Drive and Option
9 ✔
10 ✔
11 ✔
12 ✔
13 ✔
14 ✔
Using Input/Output Input Contactor Precautions

Contactors
ATTENTION: A contactor or other device that routinely
! disconnects and reapplies the AC line to the drive to start and
stop the motor can cause drive hardware damage. The drive is
designed to use control input signals that will start and stop the
motor. If an input device is used, operation must not exceed one
cycle per minute or drive damage will occur.
ATTENTION: The drive start/stop/enable control circuitry
! includes solid state components. If hazards due to accidental
contact with moving machinery or unintentional flow of liquid,
gas or solids exist, an additional hardwired stop circuit may be
required to remove the AC line to the drive. An auxiliary braking
method may be required.
Output Contactor Precaution
ATTENTION: To guard against drive damage when using

! output contactors, the following information must be read and
understood. One or more output contactors may be installed
between the drive and motor(s) for the purpose of disconnecting
or isolating certain motors/loads. If a contactor is opened while
the drive is operating, power will be removed from the respective
motor, but the drive will continue to produce voltage at the output
terminals. In addition, reconnecting a motor to an active drive (by
closing the contactor) could produce excessive current that may
cause the drive to fault. If any of these conditions are determined
to be undesirable or unsafe, an auxiliary contact on the output
contactor should be wired to a drive digital input that is
programmed as “Enable.” This will cause the drive to execute a
coast-to-stop (cease output) whenever an output contactor is
opened.
Common Bus/Precharge The following information must be read and understood:
• DC input drives do not have an internal precharge. Therefore:
– Precharge capability must be provided in the system to guard against

possible damage, and
– disconnect switches must not be used between the input of the drive
and a common DC bus without the use of an external precharge
device.
Important: Precharge circuitry is external to the drive.

DC Input Precharge Control Wiring
If you are installing a DC input drive with a precharge interlock you must
make the following connections on the X50 terminal block from the
precharge circuit. Refer to Figure 1.1 on page 1-11 for additional
information.
Table 1.D X50 Terminal Block Connections

X50 Terminal Block Frame Terminal Description
9 1 Charge Relay Contact
2 Charge Relay Contact
5 Precharge Complete Signal (+24V DC)
6 Precharge Complete Signal (Common)
10, 11 & 13 3 Charge Relay Contact
12 & 14 Power Module 1
3 Charge Relay Contact (Jumper to Power
Module 2 Terminal 4)
Power Module 2
4 Charge Relay Contact (Jumper to Power
Module 1 Terminal 21)
Table 1.E X50 Terminal Block Specifications

Wire Size Range(1) Torque
Maximum Minimum Recommended
6.0 mm2 (10 AWG) 1.0 mm2 (18 AWG) 0.8 N•m (7.0 lb•in)
(1)
Maximum/minimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations.
Table 1.F External Relay Contact Ratings

Load Resistance load (cos φ = 1)
Rated load 8 A at 250 VAC: 5 A at 30 VDC
Rated carry current 8A
Max. switching voltage 250 VAC; 30 VDC, (400 VAC)(1)
Max. switching current AC 8 A; DC 5 A
Max. switching power 2,000 VA; 150 W
Failure rate (reference value) 5 VDC 10 mA (for gold plating 0.35 µ min.)
(1) P level: λ60 = 0.1 x 10–6 operations
Figure 1.1 Frame 9 Sample Precharge Wiring Diagram

External precharge circuitry is shown as dashed lines.
M DC+
X50
1
Precharge
2 Complete
F1 R1 CR2
X1
Power
CR1 Board
DC Source Pilot Relay
M 5
CR1 M X6
6
Main DC Contactor
M CR2
Precharge
M DC-
F2 R2 CR2
Figure 1.2 Frames 10, 11 and 13 Sample Precharge Wiring Diagram

M DC+
ASIC
Board
F1 R1 CR2 X50
1 X9 Precharge
2 25
M Complete
26
X15
DC Source 3
21
22
4 23
CR1 CR1
M
M
CR2
M DC-
F2 R2 CR2
Figure 1.3 Frames 12 and 14 Sample Precharge Wiring Diagram

M DC+ PU1 ASIC

X50
1 X9 Board
25 Precharge #1
F1 R1 CR2
M 26 Complete
2
3
X15
21
22
23
4
DC Source CR1
CR1
M
CR2
M
PU2 ASIC
M DC- X50
1 X9 Board
25 Precharge #2
M 26 Complete
2
F2 R2 CR2 X15
3
21
22
23
4
Figure 1.4 Frame 9 - X50 Terminal Block Location
Frame 9 Frames 10-14
X50
X50 Terminal Block

Chapter 2
PowerFlex® 700H Control Wiring
Important points to remember about I/O wiring:
• Always use copper wire.

• Wire with an insulation rating of 600V or greater is recommended.
• Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at
least 0.3 meters (1 foot).
Important: Control (I/O) terminals labeled “(–)” or “Common” are not

referenced to earth ground and are designed to greatly reduce
common mode interference. Grounding these terminals can
cause signal noise.
ATTENTION: Inputs must be configured with software and

! jumpers (see page 2-6). In addition, configuring an analog input
for 0-20mA operation and driving it from a voltage source could
cause component damage. Verify proper configuration prior to
applying input signals.
ATTENTION: Hazard of personal injury or equipment damage
! exists when using bipolar input sources. Noise and drift in
sensitive input circuits can cause unpredictable changes in motor
speed and direction. Use speed command parameters to help
reduce input source sensitivity.
Signal and Control Wire Types

Table 2.A Recommended Signal Wire
Minimum
Signal Type Wire Type(s) Description Insulation Rating
Analog I/O Belden 8760/9460(or equiv.) 0.750 mm2 (18AWG), twisted 300V,
pair, 100% shield with drain (1). 75-90° C
Belden 8770(or equiv.) 0.750 mm2 (18AWG), 3 cond., (167-194° F)
shielded for remote pot only.
EMC Compliance Refer to EMC Instructions on page 1-7 for details.
(1) If the wires are short and contained within a cabinet which has no sensitive circuits, the use of shielded wire
may not be necessary, but is always recommended.
Table 2.B Recommended Control Wire for Digital I/O

Minimum
Type Wire Type(s) Description Insulation Rating
Unshielded Per US NEC or applicable national or – 300V,
local code 60° C
Shielded Multi-conductor shielded cable such 0.750 mm2 (18AWG), 3 (140° F)
as Belden 8770(or equiv.) conductor, shielded.
2-2 PowerFlex® 700H Control Wiring
700H Control Circuit Board Designations

The PowerFlex 700H control circuit board allows for a variety of I/O boards
to be installed depending upon your application. Each option I/O circuit
board is described below.
Figure 2.1 PowerFlex 700H Control Circuit Board
Slot
A B C D E
Important: The boards identified in the table below can only be installed in
the designated slot. Boards and slots are not interchangeable.
Table 2.C Control Board Slot Designations
Slot Used for Circuit Board . . . Part No.
A 24V DC Digital Input with Analog I/O 20C-DA1-A
115V AC Digital Input with Analog I/O 20C-DA1-B
B 24/115V Digital Output 20C-DO1
24V DC Digital Gate Disable option(1) 20C-DG1
C (Not Used) –
D (Not Used) –
E DPI Option Board 20C-DPI1
(1)
Refer to Appendix F, Instructions for ATEX Approved PowerFlex 700H Drives
in Group II Category (2) Applications with ATEX Approved Motors for more
information on installing and configuring the Gate Disable option board.
Drive Catalog Numbers for 700H Control I/O Board Options
The following codes are designated in position 15 of the drive catalog string
to indicate the desired combination of 700H I/O option boards supplied with
the drive:
Code Board in Slot A Board in Slot B Board in Slot E
A 20C-DA1-A 20C-DO1 20C-DPI1
B 20C-DA1-B 20C-DO1 20C-DPI1
G 20C-DA1-A 20C-DG1 20C-DPI1
N none none 20C-DPI1
PowerFlex® 700H Control Wiring 2-3
Figure 2.2 PowerFlex 700H I/O Terminal Blocks & Jumpers
J5
J3 & J4
J1 & J2
➋
➌
I/O Terminal Blocks and Jumpers
I/O Terminal Blocks

Table 2.D I/O Terminal Block Specifications
Wire Size Range (2) Torque
No. Name Description Maximum Minimum Maximum Recommended
➊ Analog I/O Analog I/O Signals 2.5 mm2 0.5 mm2 0.2 N-m 0.2 N-m
(14 AWG) (22 AWG) 1.8 lb.-in. 1.8 lb.-in.
➋ Digital Inputs Digital Input Signals 2.5 mm2 0.5 mm2 0.2 N-m 0.2 N-m
(14 AWG) (22 AWG) 1.8 lb.-in. 1.8 lb.-in.
➌ Digital Outputs(1) Digital Out Relays 2.5 mm2 0.5 mm2 0.5 N-m 0.5 N-m
(14 AWG) (22 AWG) 4.5 lb.-in. 4.5 lb.-in.
(1)
Refer to Appendix F, Instructions for ATEX Approved PowerFlex 700H Drives in Group II Category (2)
Applications with ATEX Approved Motors for more information on installing and configuring the Gate Disable
option board.
(2)
Maximum/minimum that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations.
I/O Cable Grounding

When installing shielded multi-conductor for analog and digital I/O, strip
the cable at such a distance from the terminal plug so you can fix the shield
to the cable clamp for grounding.
Position the
exposed shield so
it can fixed to the
clamp.
Note: This clamp is not designed for strain relief.

Figure 2.3 I/O Terminal Designations
Parameter(s)
Related
Factory
Default
No. Signal Description
1 Analog Input 1 (–) (1) (2)
Isolated (3), bipolar, differential, 9 bit & 320 -
1 2 Analog Input 1 (+) (1) sign, 88k ohm input impedance. A 327
3 Analog Input 2 (–) (1) jumper (page 2-6) selects: 0-10V, ±10V,
4-20mA. Default: 0-10V (Ri =200k),
4 Analog Input 2 (+) (1) 4-20mA (Ri=100 ohm).
5 –10V Pot Reference – 2k ohm minimum, 10 mA maximum load,
10 1% accuracy.
20 6 Pot Common (GND) For (+) and (–) 10V pot references.
7 +10V Pot Reference – 2k ohm minimum, 10mA maximum load,
1% accuracy.
8 Analog Output 1 (+) (2)
Bipolar (current out is not bipolar), 9 bit & 340 -
9 Analog Output Common sign, 2k ohm minimum load. A jumper 347
10 Analog Output 2 (+) (see page 2-6) selects: 0-10V, ±10V,
4-20mA.
11 Digital Input 1 Stop - CF 115V ac, 50/60 Hz - Opto isolated 361 -
12 Digital Input 2 Start Low State: less than 30V ac 366
13 Digital Input 3 Auto/Man High State: greater than 40V ac
24V dc - Opto isolated (250V)
14 Digital Input 4 Speed Sel 1 Low State: less than 5V dc
15 Digital Input 5 Speed Sel 2 High State: greater than 20V dc
16 Digital Input 6/Hardware Speed Sel 3 11.2 mA DC
Enable, see pg. 2-6 Enable: Digital Input 6 is jumper
selectable for HW Enable.
On-Time: < 16.7ms, Off-Time < 1ms
17 Digital Input Common Allows source or sink operation.
18 Terminals 17/18 & 19 can also be used
to provide backup power to DPI and
control devices.
19 +24VDC (4) – Drive supplied logic input power.
20 24V Common (4) – Common for internal power supply.
21 Digital Output 1 – N.C. (5) Fault Max. Resistive Load: 380 -
21 22 Digital Output 1 Common 240V ac/30V dc – 1200VA, 150W 391
23 Digital Output 1 – N.O. NOT Fault Max. Current: 5A, Min. Load: 10mA
(5)
Max. Inductive Load:
24 Digital Output 2 – N.C. (5) NOT Run 240V ac/30V dc – 840VA, 105W
25 Digital Output 2/3 Com. Max. Current: 3.5A, Min. Load: 10mA
26 Digital Output 3 – N.O. (5) Run
(1)
Important: Input must be configured with a jumper. Drive damage may occur if jumper is not installed properly. Refer
to page 2-6.
(2)
These inputs/outputs are dependant on a number of parameters (see “Related Parameters” column in table).
(3)
Differential Isolation - External source must be maintained at less than 160V with respect to PE. Input provides high
common mode immunity.
(4)
150mA maximum load. Not present on 115V versions. Can be used to provide control power from an external 24V
source when main power is not applied. Refer to page 2-6.
(5) Contacts in un-powered state. Any relay programmed as Fault or Alarm will energize (pick up) when power is applied
to drive and de-energize (drop out) when a fault or alarm exists. Relays selected for other functions will energize only
when that condition exists and will de-energize when condition is removed.
Analog I/O Configuration

Important: Analog I/O must be configured through programming, as well
as the jumpers shown below. Refer to publication
20C-PM001…, PowerFlex 700H Adjustable Frequency AC
Drive - Programming Manual.
Refer to Figure 2.2 on page 2-3 for the location of the jumpers indicated in
the table below.
Table 2.E I/O Configuration
Signal Jumper Setting
Analog J1 (Analog In 1) 0-20 mA 0-10V ±10V
Inputs J2 (Analog In 2) J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2
A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D
Analog J3 (Analog Out 1) 0-20 mA 0-10V ±10V

Outputs J4 (Analog Out 2) J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4
A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D
Hardware Enable Circuitry

By default, the user can program a digital input as an Enable input. The
status of this input is interpreted by drive software. If the application
requires the drive to be disabled without software interpretation, a
“dedicated” hardware enable configuration can be utilized. This is done by
removing jumper J5 and wiring the enable input to “Digital In 6” (see
below). Verify that parameter 366 [Digital In6 Sel] is set to “1 - Enable”.
Table 2.F Hardware Enable Configuration
Signal Jumper Setting
Hardware J5 Hardware Enable Input Programmable (No Hardware Enable)
Enable
J5 J5
A B A B
Auxiliary Power Supply

You may use an auxiliary power supply to keep the 700H Control Unit
energized, when input power is de-energized. This provides back-up power
for the Control Unit and is sufficient for setting parameters. Connect 24V dc
power to pin 19 and 24V dc common to pin 20 of the 24V dc version of the
I/O card.
Auxiliary Power Supply Specifications
Voltage Current (Min) Current (Max)

24V dc ± 15% 150 mA 250 mA
If 24V terminals of several drives are connected in parallel, we recommend

using a diode circuit to block current flow in the opposite direction. Reverse
current flow could damage the Control Board.
From Auxiliary
Power Supply
24V dc 24V dc
Power Common
:19 :20 :19 :20 :19 :20 :19 :20
I/O Wiring Examples

Input/Output Connection Example Required Parameter Changes
Potentiometer Unipolar • Set I/O configuration (refer to
Speed Reference (1) Analog I/O Configuration on
10k Ohm Pot. 3 page 2-6).
4
Recommended • Adjust Scaling:
(2k Ohm Minimum) 6 6 Parameters 91 [Speed Ref A Hi] /
92 [Speed Ref A Lo] and 325
7 [Analog In 2 Hi] / 326 [Analog In 2
Lo]
• View Results:
Parameter 002 [Commanded
Speed]
Joystick Bipolar Speed • Set I/O configuration (refer to
Reference (1) Analog I/O Configuration on
±10V Input page 2-6).
3 • Set parameter 190 [Direction Mode]
4 = 1 “Bipolar”
5
6 • Adjust Scaling:
7 Parameters 91 [Speed Ref A Hi] /
[Analog In 2 Hi] / 326 [Analog In 2
Lo]
• View Results:
Speed]

Analog Input Bipolar • Set I/O configuration (refer to
Speed Reference Analog I/O Configuration on
3
±10V Input 4
page 2-6).
• Set parameter 190 [Direction Mode]
= 1 “Bipolar”
• Adjust Scaling:
Parameters 91 [Speed Ref A Hi] /
Lo]
• View Results:
Speed]
Analog Voltage Input • Set I/O configuration (refer to
Unipolar Speed 3
Analog I/O Configuration on
Reference 4 page 2-6).
0 to +10V Input • Configure Input with parameter 320
[Anlg In Config]
• Adjust Scaling:
Lo]
• View Results:
Speed]
Analog Current Input • Set I/O configuration (refer to
Unipolar Speed Analog I/O Configuration on
3
Reference 4
page 2-6).
4-20 mA Input • Configure Input for Current:
Parameter 320 [Anlg In Config] and
add jumper at appropriate terminals
• Adjust Scaling:
Lo]
• View Results:
Speed]
Analog Input, PTC • Set I/O configuration (refer to
Ferrite
0-10V Input Bead 1
Analog I/O Configuration on
PTC OT set > 5V 1.8k page 2-6).
PTC OT cleared < 5V PTC 2 • Configure Analog Input for PTC
PTC Short < 0.2V function:
6 Set parameter 259 [Alarm Config 1]
bit 14 “PTC Config” = Enabled
3.32k 7 • Configure Analog Input for Fault
Ohm when input goes below 0.2V:
Set parameter 324 [Analog In 1
Loss] = 1 “Fault”
• Enable Fault:
Set parameter 238 [Fault Config 1]
bit 7 “Motor Therm” = Enabled
• Enable Alarm:
Set parameter 259 [Alarm Config
1], bit 11 “Motor Therm” = Enabled

Analog Output • Set I/O configuration (refer to
±10V, 4-20 mA Bipolar Analog I/O Configuration on
+10V Unipolar page 2-6).
(shown) • Configure with Parameter 340 [Anlg
Out Config]
• Select Source Value:
– + 8 Parameter 384 [Digital Out1 Sel]
9
• Adjust Scaling:
Parameters 343 [Analog Out1 Hi] /
344 [Analog Out1 Lo]
2-Wire Control • Disable Digital Input:#1:
Non-Reversing(2) 12 Parameter 361 [Digital In1 Sel] = 0
24V dc internal supply “Not Used”
• Set Digital Input #2:
Parameter 362 [Digital In2 Sel] = 7
17
“Run”
19 • Set Direction Mode:
20 Parameter 190 [Direction Mode] = 0
Stop-Run
“Unipolar”
2-Wire Control 115V/ • Set Digital Input:#1:
Reversing(2) +24V Run Fwd.
11 Parameter 361 [Digital In1 Sel] = 8
External supply 12 “Run Forward”
(I/O Board dependent) Run Rev. • Set Digital Input #2:
Neutral/ Parameter 362 [Digital In2 Sel] = 9
Common 17
“Run Reverse”
3-Wire Control Stop • No Changes Required

Internal supply 11
12
Start
17
19
20
3-Wire Control 115V/ • No Changes Required

External supply +24V Stop
11
(I/O Board dependent). 12
Requires 3-wire functions
only ([Digital In1 Sel]). Start
Using 2-wire selections will Neutral/
cause a type 2 alarm. Common 17
Digital Output • Select Source to Activate:

Power Source
Relays shown in powered Parameters 380 [Digital Out1 Sel] /
21
state with drive faulted. See 22 Fault 384 [Digital Out2 Sel]
or 23
page 2-5. 24
NOT Fault
2 relays at terminals 24-26. 25

26
NOT Run
Run

Enable Input • Configure with parameter 366
[Digital In6 Sel]
For dedicated hardware Enable:
Remove Jumper J5 (see page 2-6)
16
(1)
Refer to the Attention statement on page 2-1 for important bipolar wiring information.
(2) Important: Programming inputs for 2 wire control deactivates all HIM Start buttons unless parameter 192
[Save HIM Ref], bit 1 “Manual Mode” = “1.” This will allow the HIM to control Start and Jog.
Reference Control “Auto” Speed Sources

The drive speed command can be obtained from a number of different
sources. The source is determined by drive programming and the condition
of the Speed Select digital inputs, Auto/Manual digital inputs or reference
select bits of a command word.
The default source for a command reference (all speed select inputs open) is
the selection programmed in parameter 90 [Speed Ref A Sel]. If any of the
speed select inputs are closed, the drive will use other parameters as the
speed command source.
“Manual” Speed Sources

The manual source for speed command to the drive is either the HIM
requesting manual control or the control terminal block (analog input) if a
digital input is programmed to “Auto/Manual.”
Changing Speed Sources

The selection of the active Speed Reference can be made through digital
inputs, DPI command, jog button or Auto/Manual HIM operation.
Figure 2.4 Speed Reference Selection Chart(1)
= Default [Digital Inx Select]: PI Exclusive Mode

Trim Speed Sel 3 2 1 [PI Configuration]: Pure Reference
Auto Speed Ref Options Bit 0, Excl Mode = 0 Drive Ref Rslt
to follower drive for
Speed Ref A Sel, Parameter 090 0 0 0 Frequency Reference
Speed Ref B Sel, Parameter 093 0 0 1
Mod Functions
Preset Speed 2, Parameter 102 0 1 0 (Skip, Clamp,
Auto
Preset Speed 3, Parameter 103 0 1 1 Direction, etc.)
Preset Speed 4, Parameter 104 1 0 0
Preset Speed 5, Parameter 105 1 0 1 Min/Max Speed
Preset Speed 6, Parameter 106 1 1 0
1 1 1 Commanded
Preset Speed 7, Parameter 107
Frequency
DPI Port Ref 1-6, See Parameter 209 DPI Command
Manual Speed Ref Options Acc/Dec Ramp

and
HIM Requesting Auto/Manual Man S Curve
TB Man Ref Sel, Parameter 096 Digital Input
Post Ramp
Jog Speed, Parameter 100 Jog Command
to follower drive for
Speed Adders [Speed Mode]: Frequency Reference
PI Output 2 "Process Pi"
Slip Compensation 1 "Slip Comp"
None 0 "Open Loop"
Output Frequency
Auto/Manual Examples PLC = Auto, HIM = Manual

A process is run by a PLC when in Auto mode and requires manual control
from the HIM during set-up. The Auto speed reference is issued by the PLC
through a communications module installed in the drive. Since the internal
communications is designated as Port 5, [Speed Ref A Sel] is set to “DPI
Port 5” with the drive running from the Auto source.
Attain Manual Control

• Press ALT then Auto/Man on the HIM.
When the HIM attains manual control, the drive speed command comes
from the HIM speed control keys or analog potentiometer.
Release to Auto Control

• Press ALT then Auto/Man on the HIM again.
When the HIM releases manual control, the drive speed command
returns to the PLC.
(1)
To access Preset Speed 1, set parameter 090 or 093 to “Preset Speed 1.”
PLC = Auto, Terminal Block = Manual

A process is run by a PLC when in Auto mode and requires manual control
from an analog potentiometer wired to the drive terminal block. The auto
speed reference is issued by the PLC through a communications module
installed in the drive. Since the internal communications is designated as
Port 5, [Speed Ref A Sel] is set to “DPI Port 5” with the drive running from
the Auto source. Since the Manual speed reference is issued by an analog
input (“Analog In 1 or 2”), parameter 96 [TB Man Ref Sel] is set to the
same input. To switch between Auto and Manual, parameter 364 [Digital
In4 Sel] is set to “Auto/ Manual”.
Attain Manual Control

• Close the digital input.
With the input closed, the speed command comes from the pot.
Release to Auto Control

• Open the digital input.
With the input open, the speed command returns to the PLC.
Auto/Manual Notes
1. Manual control is exclusive. If a HIM or Terminal Block takes manual
control, no other device can take manual control until the controlling
device releases manual control.
2. If a HIM has manual control and power is removed from the drive, the
drive will return to Auto mode when power is reapplied.
3. Parameter 192 [Save HIM Ref] can enable manual mode to allow starts
and jogs from the HIM in 2-wire mode.
Chapter 3
Control Wiring for PowerFlex 700S Drives with

Phase I Control
I/O Wiring Important points to remember about I/O wiring:
• Always use tinned copper wire.

• 4100CCF3 Flex I/O cable for use with DriveLogix is limited to a 3 ft.
maximum length.
Important: I/O terminals labeled “(–)” or “Common” are not referenced to

earth ground and are designed to greatly reduce common mode
interference. Grounding these terminals can cause signal noise.

! exists when using bipolar input sources. Noise and drift in sensitive
input circuits can cause unpredictable changes in motor speed and
direction. Use speed command parameters to help reduce input
source sensitivity.
Table 3.A Recommended Control Wire

Insulation
Type Wire Type(s) Description Rating
Digital I/O Un-shielded Per US NEC or applicable –
national or local code 300V, 60o C
(140o F),
Shielded Multi-conductor shielded cable 0.750 mm2 (18AWG), 3 Minimum
such as Belden 8770(or equiv.) conductor, shielded.
3-2 Control Wiring for PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase I Control
Insulation
Standard Belden 8760/9460(or equiv.) 0.750 mm2 (18AWG),
Analog I/O twisted pair, 100% shield
with drain (5).
Remote Pot Belden 8770(or equiv.) 0.750 mm2 (18AWG), 3
cond., shielded
Encoder/ Combined: Belden 9730 (or equivalent) (1) 0.196 mm2 (24AWG),
Pulse I/O individually shielded.
Less 30.5 m
(100 ft.) 300V,
Encoder/ Signal: Belden 9730/9728 (or 0.196 mm2 (24AWG), 75-90 ºC
Pulse I/O equivalent) (1) individually shielded. (167-194 ºF)
30.5 m (100
ft.) to 152.4 Power: Belden 8790 (2) 0.750 mm2 (18AWG)
(3)
m (500 ft.) Combined: Belden 9892 0.330 mm2 or 0.500 mm2
(3)
Encoder/ Signal: Belden 9730/9728 (or 0.196 mm2 (24AWG),

Pulse I/O (1)
equivalent) individually shielded.
152.4 m
(500 ft.) to Power: Belden 8790 (2) 0.750 mm2 (18AWG)
259.1 m Combined: Belden 9773/9774 (or 0.750 mm2 (18AWG),
(850 ft.) equivalent) (4) individually shielded pair.
EMC Refer to EMC Instructions on page 1-7 for details.
Compliance
(1)
Belden 9730 is 3 individually shielded pairs (2 channel plus power). If 3 channel is required, use Belden 9728
(or equivalent).
(2)
Belden 8790 is 1 shielded pair.
(3) Belden 9892 is 3 individually shielded pairs (3 channel), 0.33 mm2 (22 AWG) plus 1 shielded pair 0.5 mm2 (20
AWG) for power.
(4)
(or equivalent).
(5)
If the wires are short and contained within a cabinet which has no sensitive circuits, the use of shielded wire
Control Wiring for PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase I Control 3-3
Wiring the Main Control Board I/O Terminals

Terminal blocks TB1 and TB2 contain connection points for all inputs,
outputs and standard encoder connections. Both terminal blocks reside on
the Main Control Board.
Remove the terminal block plug from the socket, and make the connections.
Reinstall the plug, when wiring is complete. The terminal blocks have keys,
which make it difficult to insert a terminal plug into the wrong socket.
Table 3.B Main Control Board I/O Terminal Locations
TB1 - Row T (Top)

TB1 - Row B (Bottom)
TB1
TB2 - Row T (Top)
TB2
TB2 - Row B (Bottom)
Table 3.C Main Control Board I/O Terminal Block Specifications

Wires Size Range(1) Torque
Name Description Maximum Minimum Maximum Recommended
I/O & Encoder Signal & Encoder 1.5 mm2 0.14 mm2 0.25 N-m 0.22 N-m
Blocks power connections (16 AWG) (28 AWG) (2.2 lb.-in.) (1.9 lb.-in.)
(1)
Maximum/minimum sizes the terminal block will accepts - these are not recommendations.
Table 3.D TB1 - Row T (Top) Terminals

Related
Terminal Signal Description Parameter
T11 Power Supply 24V dc Return (-) Power and common for precharge and enable
T10 Power Supply 24V dc (+) inputs.(1) Inputs may sink or source.(2)
T9 Logic Common Rating: 100 mA maximum.
T8 Digital Input 1 For common DC bus drives. Must be high, for 824, 826,
11
drive to complete the precharge cycle. 827, 828,
10
Default = Precharge Load: 20 mA at 24V dc. 829, 838

9
T7 Enable Input Must be high for drive to run. 824, 825

8
Load: 20 mA at 24V dc.

7
6
T6 Digital Output 1 24V dc open collector (sinking logic) output. 824, 843,
5
Rating: 25 mA maximum. 844

4
T5 Digital Output 2 24V dc open collector (sinking logic) output. 824, 845,
3
Rating: 25 mA maximum. 846

2
T4 Digital Output Return Return for Digital outputs 1 and 2.

T1
T3 Thermistor Input Used only in FOC2 mode with approved motor for 485
T2 Thermistor Input Return temperature adaptation.
T1 Thermistor Shield Refer to Appendix A, “Supplemental Information”,
in publication 20D-UM001..., User Manual -
PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive,
Phase I Control, for approved motors.
(1) The drive’s 24V dc power supply supports only on-board digital inputs. Do not use it to power circuits outside of the drive.
(2)
Refer to wiring examples of sinking and sourcing outputs.
Figure 3.1 TB1 - Row T (Top) Wiring Examples

The following definitions are used throughout this section:
Source
A. Apply positive voltage through the device to the input or output.
B. Connect the input or output common (return) directly to the power supply common.
Sinking
A. Apply the positive voltage directly to the input or output common (return).
B. Connect the input or output to the power supply common through the device
Digital Inputs used for enable Sourcing Precharge and Enable Inputs - using internal power Enable - In a sourcing configuration, this circuit must
and precharge control. supply connect to a 24V dc power for the drive to run.
Note: 11 Precharge
24V dc Supply - supports 10 Precharge control is used in common bus
only on-board digital inputs. 9 configurations and is not required for AC fed drives.
Do not use for circuits outside 8
the drive. 7 Precharge If precharge control is not required, reprogram Par

838 [DigIn1 Sel] to a value of zero or replace the
Enable contact shown with a jumper from terminal 8 to
terminal 10.
If precharge is needed, in sourcing configuration, this

circuit must connect to 24V dc power for the drive to
Sourcing Precharge and Enable Inputs - using external power complete the precharge cycle.
Common
(Return) +24V dc
9
8
7
Precharge
Enable

Sinking Precharge and Enable Inputs - using internal power Enable - In a sinking configuration, this circuit must
supply connect to a 24V dc return for the drive to run.
11
10 Precharge
9 Precharge control is used in common bus
8 configurations and is not required for AC fed drives.
7 Precharge
If precharge control is not required, reprogram Par
Enable 838 [DigIn1 Sel] to a value of zero or replace the
contact shown with a jumper from terminal 8 to
terminal 11.
If precharge is needed, in sinking configuration, this

circuit must connect to a 24V dc return for the drive to
Sinking Precharge and Enable Inputs - using external power complete the precharge cycle.
supply
Common
+24V DC (Return)
9
8
7 Precharge
Enable
Digital Outputs - 24V dc Digital Output 1 Indicating Alarm and Digital Output 2
outputs 25 mA maximum per Indicating Fault - in sourcing configuration Example: Using Digital Outputs 1 and 2 to
output. 11 Annunciate Alarms and Faults
10 • Link Parameter 155 [Logic Status], the source, to
Parameter 843 [DigOut 1 Data], the sink
• Set Parameter 844 [DigOut 1 Bit] to a value of 8, so
that parameter 155 [Logic Status], bit 8 “Alarm” will
6 Alarm
control the output
5
4
• Link Parameter 155 [Logic Status], the source, to
Fault Parameter 845 [DigOut 2 Data], the sink
• Set Parameter 846 [DigOut 2 Bit] to a value of 7, so
that Parameter 155 [Logic Status], bit 7 “Faulted”
will control the output
Digital Output - 24V dc Digital Output 1 Indicating Alarm Fault - in sinking Example: Using Digital Output 1 to Annunciate
output 25 mA maximum per configuration Alarms
output. 11 • Link Parameter 155 [Logic Status], the source, to
10 Parameter 843 [DigOut 1 Data], the sink
If one output is configured in • Set Parameter 844 [DigOut 1 Bit] to a value of 8, so
sinking, the other output is not that Parameter 155 [Logic Status], bit 8 “Alarm” will
available. control the output
6
Alarm
Table 3.E TB1 - Row B (Bottom) Terminals
Parameter
Related
Terminal Signal Description
B11 Analog Input 1 (-) +/-10.0V dc or +/-1.0V dc bipolar, 800, 802,
B10 Analog Input 1 (+) differential input. (1) 13 bit + sign, 803, 804,
20k ohm input impedance. 805
B9 Analog Input Shield Optional connection point for
11
analog input shield. (2)
10
B8 Analog Input 2 (-) +/-10.0V dc or +/-1.0V dc bipolar, 806, 808,
9
B7 Analog Input 2 (+) differential input. (1) 13 bit + sign, 809, 810,
8
20k ohm input impedance. 811
7
6
B6 Analog Output 1 (+) +/-10.0V dc bipolar, differential 812, 814,
5
B5 Analog Output 1 Return (-) output, 11 bit + sign, 2k ohm 815, 817,
4
minimum load. 818
3
B4 Analog Output Shield Optional connection point for
2
analog output shield. (2)

B1
B3 Analog Output 2 (+) +/-10.0V dc bipolar, differential 813, 819,

B2 Analog Output 2 Return (-) output, 11 bit + sign, 2k ohm 820, 822,
minimum load. 823,
B1 Analog Output Shield Optional connection point for
analog shields.
(1)
Refer to Analog Input Settings on page 3-17 for necessary dip switch settings.
(2)
Analog shields should connect to common at the signal source, if possible. Shields for signals from ungrounded
devices, such as analog tachometers, should connect to an analog shield terminal point at the drive.
Figure 3.2 TB1 - Row B (Bottom) Wiring Examples

Analog Inputs Analog Inputs for Speed Reference and Speed Trim - shield Example: Using Analog Input 1 as 0-10V speed
+/-10V dc or +/-1.0V dc terminated at the source reference
(DIP switch selectable) • Adjust Parameter 803 [Anlg In1 Offset] so that
11
Terminate shields at the analog -
Analog Input #1
the minimum analog signal creates the
source if analog common is 10 + minimum speed reference (if the minimum input
Speed
available Common Reference is 0V dc and the minimum speed reference is
(Return) zero, enter a value of zero)
8
-
Used for Speed Reference and 7 Analog Input #2 • Adjust Parameter 802 [Anlg In1 Scale] so that
Speed Trim + Speed the maximum analog signal creates the
Common Trim
(Return) maximum speed reference (if the maximum
input is 10V dc and the maximum speed
reference is motor base speed, enter a value of
0.1)
• Send the data to the Speed Reference
parameter Par 10 [Speed Ref 1] (the
destination) linked to Par 800 [Anlg In1 Data]
(the source)
• Select 1 - “Spd Ref 1” as the active speed ref in
Analog Inputs for Speed Reference and Speed Trim - shield Par 16 [Speed Ref Sel]
terminated at the drive • In Par 153 [Control Options] set bit 0 “Bipolar
SRef” = 1
11 Analog Input #1 Example: Using Analog Input 2 as -10 to +10V
- speed trim @ 10%:
Speed
10 + Reference • Adjust Parameter 809 [Anlg In2 Offset] so that
the minimum analog signal creates the
8 Analog Input #2
minimum speed trim (if the minimum input is 0V
- dc and the minimum trim is zero, enter a value
7 Speed
+ Trim of zero)
• Adjust Parameter 808 [Anlg In2 Scale] so that
the maximum analog signal creates the
maximum speed trim (if the maximum input is
10V dc and the maximum speed trim is 10%,
enter a value of 0.01)
• Send the data to the Par 12 [Speed Ref 2] (the
destination) linked to Par 806 [Anlg In2 Data]
(the source)
• Use Par 10 [Spd Ref 1] as the active speed
reference and Par 12 [Spd Ref 2] as the speed
trim. Set Par 16 [Speed Ref Sel] = 3 - “Spd Ref
3”

Analog Outputs Analog Outputs Indicating Motor Speed and Motor Current Example: Using Analog Output 1, -10V to +10V
+/-10V dc or +/-1.0V dc to meter Motor RPM and direction:
• Adjust Parameter 812 [Anlg Out1 Offset] so that
Used to drive analog meters minimum speed creates a minimum signal (if
displaying speed and current the minimum speed is zero and the minimum
signal is zero, enter a zero)
Output #1
Motor Speed • Adjust Parameter 817 [Anlg Out1 Scale] so that
6
+ - the maximum speed creates a maximum signal
5
Output #2
(if the maximum speed is 100% of motor base
4 Motor Current speed and the maximum signal is 10V dc, enter
3 + - a value of 0.1)
2 • Send the data to the Analog Output: Par 815
1 [Anlg Out1 Real] (the destination) linked to Par
300 [Motor Spd Fdbk] (the source)
Example: Using Analog Output 2, -10V to +10V
to meter Motor Current
• Adjust Parameter 813 [Anlg Out2 Offset] so that
minimum current creates a minimum signal (if
the minimum current is zero and the minimum
signal is zero, enter a zero)
• Adjust Parameter 822 [Anlg Out2 Scale] so that
the maximum current creates a maximum signal
(if the maximum current is 200% of motor NP
FLA and the maximum signal is 10V dc, enter a
value of 2.0)
• Send the data to the Analog Output
Par 820 [Anlg Out2 Real] (the destination)
linked to Par 308 [Output Current] (the source)
• Scale the Output to the source parameter
Par 822 [Anlg Out2 Scale] = xx (Par2 [Motor NP
FLA]/10V Output)
Table 3.F TB2 - Row T (Top) Terminals
Parameter
Related
T13 Encoder Signal A Primary encoder interface. 5 or 12V 222, 230,
T12 Encoder Signal Not A dc switch selectable (1), Nominal 231, 232,
T11 Encoder Signal B current draw per channel @ 12V dc 233, 234,
45 mA, @5V dc 32 mA 235, 236,
T10 Encoder Signal Not B Maximum input frequency for 237, 238
10 11 12 13
T9 Encoder Signal Z Encoders 0 & 1 is 500 kHz.
T8 Encoder Signal Not Z
T7 Shield Connection point for encoder shield.
9
8
T6 Digital Input #2 High speed 12-24V dc sinking 824, 830,

7
T5 Digital Input #2 Return digital input. 831, 832,

6
833, 839
5
4
T4 Digital Input #3 High speed 12-24V dc sinking 824, 834,

3
T3 Digital Input #3 Return digital input. 835, 836,

2
837, 840
T1
T2 Power Supply +12V dc (A) (+) 5/12V dc power supply for primary
T1 Power Supply +12V dc Return (A) (-) encoder interface and (2)
high speed
inputs. Rating 300 mA (3)
(1)
Refer to Encoder Input Settings on page 3-17 for necessary dip switch settings.
(2) This power supply supports only the primary encoder interface and digital inputs. Do not use it to power circuits outside of the
drive.
(3) To enable 5V supply, set Jumper J6 (located in the Main Control Board) to positions T2 and T3. Default 12V supply is set to T1 and
T2.

Input/Output Connection Examples Required Parameter Changes
Primary Encoder Interface - Primary Encoder - using internal power supply Example: Using Encoder 0 for Primary Motor
Supports 12V dc differential Speed Feedback
encoders with internal power • Set the value of Parameter 222 [Motor Fdbk
supply. Sel] to a value of 0 - “Encoder 0”, so the drive
will use this encoder as the primary motor
1 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
5V dc differential encoders may speed feedback device.
require external power supply • Set the value of Parameter 232 [Encoder0 PPR]
and special jumper settings. to match the encoder’s resolution.
Refer to Main Control Board I/O
and Encoder Settings on
page 3-17 for external power
supply and jumper settings.
For 5V dc differential encoders

with internal power supply, set
Jumper J6 to positions T2 and
T3. Power
Common
Z Z B B A A
(Return) Case Ground
Primary Encoder - using external power supply
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Shield
Power
Common
(Return)
Power Z Z B B A A
Common

Input/Output Connection Examples — 3-Wire Control Required Parameter Changes
High Speed Inputs Sourcing High Speed Inputs, Used for 3 Wire Control - using Example: Three Wire Control
12 or 24V dc the internal power supply • Set the value of Parameter 839 [DigIn 2 Sel] to
1 - “Normal Stop”
• Set the value of Parameter 840 [DigIn 3 Sel] to
2 - “Start”
• Set Parameter 153 [Control Options], bit 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 “3WireControl” = 1
Start
Note: +12V and +24V are also available from

Stop
TB1 Top 10 & 11.
Sourcing High Speed Inputs, Used for 3 Wire Control - using an
external power supply
External
12 or 24V dc
Power Supply
Common
Power (Return)
3 4 5 6 7
Start
Stop

Input/Output Connection Examples — 2-Wire Control Required Parameter Changes
High Speed Inputs Sourcing High Speed Inputs, Used for 2 Wire Control - using Example: Two Wire Control
12 or 24V dc the internal power supply • Set the value of Parameter 839 [DigIn 2 Sel] to
3 -“Run”
• Set Parameter 153 [Control Options], bit 9 “2W
CoastStop” = 1, to make the drive coast stop
when Digital Input 2 goes low
1 2 3 5 6 7
• Reset Parameter 153 [Control Options], bit 9
“2W CoastStop” = 0, to make the drive ramp
stop when Digital Input 2 goes low
• Reset Parameter 153 [Control Options], bit 8
“3WireControl” = 0, for 2 wire control
Run-Stop
Sourcing High Speed Inputs, Used for 2 Wire Control - using an Note: +12V and +24V are also available from
external power supply TB1 Top 10 & 11.
External
12 or 24V dc
Power Supply
Common
Power (Return)
3 5 6
Run-Stop
Table 3.G TB2 - Row B (Bottom) Terminals
Parameter
Related
B13 Encoder Signal A Secondary encoder interface. 222, 240,
B12 Encoder Signal Not A 5 or 12V dc switch selectable 241, 242,
(1)
B11 Encoder Signal B , Nominal current draw per 243, 244,
channel @ 12V dc 45 mA, 245, 246,
B10 Encoder Signal Not B
10 11 12 13
@5V dc 32 mA 247, 248
B9 Encoder Signal Z Maximum input frequency for
B8 Encoder Signal Not Z Encoders 0 & 1 is 500 kHz.
9
B7 Shield Connection point for encoder
8
7
6 shield.
B6 Unused
5
B5 Relay Output Relay contact output. 824, 841,

4
B4 Relay Output Return Rating: 5A @ 24V dc 842

3
Resistive, 2A 24V dc
2
B1
Inductive
B3 Unused
B2 Power Supply +12V dc (B) (+) 15/2V dc power supply for
B1 Power Supply +12V dc Return (B) (-) secondary encoder interface.
Rating 300 mA(2) (3)
(1)
Refer to Encoder Input Settings on page 3-17 for necessary dip switch settings.
(2)
This power supply supports only the secondary encoder interface. Do not use it to power circuits outside of the drive
(3) To enable 5V supply, set Jumper J6 (located in the Main Control Board) to positions T2 and T3. Default 12V supply is
set to T1 and T2.

Secondary Encoder Interface Secondary Encoder - using internal power supply Example: Using Encoder 1 for Primary Motor
- Supports 12V dc differential Speed Feedback
encoders with internal power • Set the value of Parameter 222 [Motor Fdbk
supply. Sel] to 1 - “Encoder 1”, so the drive will use this
encoder as the primary motor speed feedback
5V dc differential encoders 1 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 device
require external power supply • Set the value of Parameter 242 [Encoder1 PPR]
and special jumper settings. to match the encoder’s resolution
Refer to Auxiliary Power
Supply on page 3-16 for
external power supply and
jumper settings.
For 5V dc differential encoders

with internal power supply, set
Jumper J6 to positions T2 and
T3. Power Z Z B B A A
Common
Secondary Encoder - using external power supply
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Shield
Power
Common
(Return)
Power Z Z B B A A
Common
Auxiliary Output - Relay Auxiliary Output, Used to Indicate Running Example: Using Auxiliary Output to Indicate
contact output Running
• Link Parameter 155 [Logic Status], the source,
External
24V dc
Common External to Parameter 841 [Relay Out Data], the sink
(Return) 24V Power
• Set Parameter 842 [Relay Out Bit] to 1, so that
Parameter 155 [Logic Status], bit 1 “Running”
4 5 will control the output.
Running
Hardware Enable Circuitry The PowerFlex 700S provides a dedicated hardware enable input for
applications that require the drive to be disabled without software
interpretation.
Auxiliary Power Supply You may use an auxiliary power supply to keep the 700S Control Assembly
energized, when input power is de-energized. This allows the Main Control
Board, DriveLogix controller and any feedback option cards to continue
operation. Connect auxiliary power to J15 on the Fiber Optic Interface
board. You must set parameter 153 [Control Options], bit 17 “Aux Pwr
Sply” to enable this feature.
Table 3.H Auxiliary Power Supply Specifications
Voltage Current (Min) Power (Min)
24V dc ± 5% 3A 75W
Figure 3.5 PowerFlex Fiber Optic Interface Board
J15 Auxiliary
Power Connector
Pin 1 (24V dc power)
Pin 3 (24V dc common)
Main Control Board I/O and

Encoder Settings
SW1
SIDE VIEW FRONT - TOP VIEW
UP = OPEN = OFF
1 2
DOWN = CLOSED= ON
Analog Input #1 +/-10.0V dc +/-1.0V dc

Scaling
SW1-1 Open Closed
Analog Input #2 +/-10.0V dc +/-1.0V dc

Scaling
SW1-2 Open Closed
SW2
SIDE VIEW FRONT - TOP VIEW
UP = OPEN = OFF
OPEN
J6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pin 3
DOWN = CLOSED= ON
Pin 2
Pin 1
Encoder Power Jumper Primary Encoder SW2-2 SW2-4 SW2-6

Supply Voltage Position 5V dc Operation Closed Closed Closed
5V dc 2-3 12V dc Operation Open Open Open
12V dc 1-2
Secondary Encoder SW2-1 SW2-3 SW2-5
5V dc Operation Closed Closed Closed
12V dc Operation Open Open Open
Analog Input Settings

Switch SW1-1 configures the scaling of Analog Input #1. Switch SW1-2
configures the scaling of Analog Input #2. Open the switch for +/-10.0V dc
operation. Close the switch for +/-1.0V dc operation.
Encoder Input Settings

Dip switch SW2 on the main control board configures the encoder inputs
for 5V dc or 12V dc operation. Switches SW2-2, 4, and 6 are for the
primary encoder. Set these switches to match the encoder output
specifications. Open these switches for 12V dc operation, close them for 5V
dc operation.
Switches SW2-1, 3, and 5 are for the secondary encoder. Set these switches
to match the encoder output specifications. Open these switches for 12V dc
operation, close them for 5V dc operation.
Encoder Output Settings

Jumper J6 on the main control board configures the encoder power supply
for either 5V dc or 12V dc operation. Place the jumper on pins 1 and 2 for
12V operation. Place it on pins 2 and 3 for 5V dc operation.
Connecting SynchLink SynchLink provides high-speed synchronization and communication

between multiple PowerFlex 700S drives (or other products with SynchLink
capability).
Class 1 LED Product
ATTENTION: Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when

! using optical transmission equipment. This product emits intense
light and invisible radiation. Do not look into module ports or
fiber optic cable connectors.
Refer to publication number 1756-TD008, SynchLink System Design Guide,

when planning and connecting the SynchLink network.
Connect cables to J9 (receive) and J8 (transmit) connectors on the bottom of

the Main Control Board. Push the plug into the socket until it produces an
audible click.
J8 (Transmit)
J9 (Receive)
Important: Do not overtighten tie-wraps.

Table 3.I SynchLink Cables and Accessories

Description Cat. No.
2 x 1 M Fiber Optic Link 1403-CF001
10 M Fiber Optic Link 1403-CF010
500 M Fiber Optic Bulk 1403-CFBLK
SynchLink Fiber-Hub, 1 input, Base 1751-SLBA
SynchLink Fiber-Hub, 4 output, “Star” Splitter 1751-SL4SP
SynchLink Bypass Switch 1751-SLBP/A
Table 3.J Fiber Optic Cable Assembly

Specification
Connecting Cables 200/230 micron HCS (Hard Clad Silica)
• Versalink V-System
• Lucent Technologies,
• Specialty Fibers Technology Division
Maximum 300 meters with no more than one splice or one adapter
Cable Length
Minimum 1 meter
Cable Length
Minimum inside bend radius 25.4mm (1 in.) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
damage the fiber optic cable. Signal attention increases with
decreased inside bend radius.
Operating Wavelength 650 nm (Red)
Data Rate 5 Mbps
Maximum • 10 - Daisy Chain
Node Count • 256 - Star Configuration
Notes:
Chapter 4
Control Wiring for PowerFlex 700S Drives with

Phase II Control
I/O Wiring Important points to remember about I/O wiring:
• Always use tinned copper wire.

• 4100CCF3 Flex I/O cable for use with DriveLogix is 3 ft. maximum
length.
Important: I/O terminals labeled “(–)” or “Common” are not referenced to
earth ground and are designed to greatly reduce common mode
interference. Grounding these terminals can cause signal noise.

! exists when using bipolar input sources. Noise and drift in sensitive
input circuits can cause unpredictable changes in motor speed and
direction. Use speed command parameters to help reduce input
source sensitivity.
4-2 Control Wiring for PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase II Control
Table 4.A Recommended Control Wire

Insulation
Digital I/O Un-shielded Per US NEC or applicable –
national or local code 300V, 60o C
(140o F),
Shielded 0.750 mm2 (18AWG), 3
Multi-conductor shielded cable Minimum
such as Belden 8770(or equiv.)
conductor, shielded.
Standard Belden 8760/9460(or equiv.) 0.750 mm2 (18AWG),
Analog I/O twisted pair, 100% shield
with drain (5).
Remote Pot Belden 8770(or equiv.) 0.750 mm2 (18AWG), 3
cond., shielded
Encoder/ Combined: Belden 9730 (or equivalent) (1) 0.196 mm2 (24AWG),
Pulse I/O individually shielded.
Less 30.5 m
(100 ft.) 300V,
Encoder/ Signal: Belden 9730/9728 (or 0.196 mm2 (24AWG), 75-90 ºC
Pulse I/O equivalent) (1) individually shielded. (167-194 ºF)
30.5 m (100
ft.) to 152.4 Power: Belden 8790 (2) 0.750 mm2 (18AWG)
(3)
m (500 ft.) Combined: Belden 9892 0.330 mm2 or 0.500 mm2
(3)
Encoder/ Signal: Belden 9730/9728 (or 0.196 mm2 (24AWG),

Pulse I/O equivalent) (1) individually shielded.
152.4 m
(500 ft.) to Power: Belden 8790 (2) 0.750 mm2 (18AWG)
259.1 m Combined: Belden 9773/9774 (or 0.750 mm2 (18AWG),
(850 ft.) equivalent) (4) individually shielded pair.
EMC Refer to EMC Instructions on page 1-7 for details.
Compliance
(1)
(or equivalent).
(2)
Belden 8790 is 1 shielded pair.
(3) Belden 9892 is 3 individually shielded pairs (3 channel), 0.33 mm2 (22 AWG) plus 1 shielded pair 0.5 mm2 (20
AWG) for power.
(4)
(or equivalent).
(5)
If the wires are short and contained within a cabinet which has no sensitive circuits, the use of shielded wire
Control Wiring for PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase II Control 4-3
I/O Terminal Blocks Wiring the Main Control Board I/O Terminals
Terminal blocks TB1 and TB2 contain connection points for all inputs,
outputs and standard encoder connections. Both terminal blocks reside on
the Main Control Board.
Remove the terminal block plug from the socket, and make connections.
Important: For NEMA/UL Type 1 applications, all wiring must be routed

through the conduit plate on the drive. Route any wires from the
expanded cassette to the base cassette and out of the drive.
Reinstall the plug when wiring is complete. The terminal blocks have keys,
which make it difficult to insert a terminal plug into the wrong socket.
Table E Control & Encoder Terminal Block Specifications

Wires Size Range(1) Torque
Name Description Maximum Minimum Maximum Recommended
I/O Blocks Signal & Encoder 1.5 mm2 0.14 mm2 0.25 N-m 0.22 N-m
power connections (16 AWG) (28 AWG) (2.2 lb.-in.) (1.9 lb.-in.)
(1)
Maximum/minimum sizes the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations.
Main Control Board I/O Terminal Locations
TB1 Terminals
TB2 Terminals
Table F TB1 Terminals

Factory
Terminal Signal Default Description
1 Analog Input 1 Comm. (Volt) Bipolar, differential input, +/-10V, 0-20 mA, 13 bit +
1 2 Analog Input 1 (+/-) sign
2 20k Ohm impedance at Volt; 500 Ohm impedance
3
4
at mA(1)
5 3 Shield NA Analog Input Shield
6
4 Analog Input 2 Comm. (Volt) Bipolar, differential input, +/-10V, 0-20 mA, 13 bit +
7
8 5 Analog Input 2 (+/-) sign
9 20k Ohm impedance at Volt; 500 Ohm impedance
10 at mA
11
12 6 Analog Input 3 [NTC-] Comm. (Volt) Differential input, 0-10V, 10 bit (for motor control
7 Analog Input 3 [NTC+] mode FVC2, this is the temperature adaptation
input).
8 Shield NA Analog Output Shield
9 Analog Output 1 (-) (Volt) Bipolar, differential output, +/-10V, 0-20 mA, 11 bit
10 Analog Output 1 (+) + sign
11 Analog Output 2 (-) (Volt) 2k Ohm minimum load
13
14
12 Analog Output 2 (+)
15
16 13 +10V Reference NA Rating: 20 mA maximum load (Recommend 5k
17 14 Reference Common NA Ohm pot)
18
19
15 -10V Reference NA
20 16 Encoder A NA Normal current draw per channel: 20 mA
21
22 17 Encoder A (Not) NA
23 18 Encoder B NA
24
19 Encoder B (Not) NA
20 Encoder Z NA
21 Encoder Z (Not) NA
22 Encoder Reference (+) NA 12 or 5V DC power supply for primary encoder
23 Encoder Reference (-) NA interface
Rating: 300 mA maximum
24 Encoder Shield NA Connection point for encoder shield
(1)
The analog inputs are not isolated. However, the analog inputs can be connected in series when using current mode. Note that at 20mA the
voltage source must be capable of providing 10V dc at the drive terminals for one drive - - 20V dc is required for two drives and 30V dc is
required for three drives.
Table G TB2 Terminals

Factory
Terminal Signal Default Description
1 24V DC Common (-) NA Drive supplied 24V DC logic input power
1 2 24V DC Source (+) NA Rating: 300 mA maximum load
2
3
3 Digital Output 1 24V DC Open Collector (sinking logic)
4 Rating: Internal Source = 150 mA max.
5 External Source = 750 mA
6
7
4 Digital Output 1/2 Com NA Common for Digital Output 1 & 2
8 5 Digital Output 2 24V DC Open Collector (sinking logic)
Rating: Internal Source = 150 mA max.
External Source = 750 mA
6 Relay Output 3 (NC) Relay contact output
7 Relay Output 3 Com NA Rating: 115V AC or 24V DC = 2 A max.
8 Relay Output 3 (NO) Inductive/Resistive
9 Digital Input 1-3 Com NA Common for Digital Inputs 1-3
9
10 10 Digital Input 1 High speed 12V or 24V DC(1), sinking
11
11 Digital Input 2 Load:15 mA at 24V DC
12
13
14 12 Digital Input 3 Load:15 mA at 24V DC sourcing
15
13 Digital Input 4-6 Com NA Common for Digital Inputs 4-6
16
14 Digital Input 4 Load: 10 mA at 24V DC sinking/sourcing
15 Digital Input 5 Load: 7.5 mA at 115V AC
16 Digital Input 6 HW Enable Note: The 115 VAC Digital Inputs can withstand 2
milliamps of leakage current without turning on. If an
output device has a leakage current greater than 2
milliamps a burden resistor is required. A 68.1K ohm
resistor with a 0.5 watt rating should be used to keep
the 115 VAC output below 2 milliamps.
(1)
Digital Inputs 1 and 2 are configured for 12V or 24V DC via DIP switches S3-1 and S3-2, respectively. 24V DC is the default setting.
I/O Wiring Examples Table H TB2 Terminals — Digital Wiring Examples

Input/Output Connection Example
Digital Inputs used for Sourcing Digital Inputs - Internal Power Supply Sourcing and Sinking Definitions
enable and precharge Com The digital inputs and digital outputs of the PowerFlex
control. 1 700S AC drive support Sourcing or Sinking configuration.
24V dc
2 Typically, digital inputs are sourcing devices and digital
Note: 3 outputs are sinking devices. The following definitions
24V DC Supply - apply throughout this section:
supports only on-board 4
9
digital inputs. Do not use 5 • Sourcing a Digital Input - The digital input common
10
for circuits outside the 6 (return) is connected to the power supply common.
drive. 11
7 Applying a positive voltage to the digital input will
12 cause it to activate (pull up).
8
Note: 13 • Sinking a Digital Input - The digital input common
The factory default for 14 (return) is connected to the power supply positive
Digital Inputs is 24V. This voltage. Applying 0V or common to the digital input will
must be switched in 15
cause it to activate (pull down).
order to use 115V. 16 • Sourcing a Digital Output - The digital output
common (return) is connected to the power supply
Sourcing Digital Outputs - Internal Power Supply common. The device to be controlled by the digital
Com
1 output is connect to the positive voltage and the device
2
24V dc common is connected to the digital output.
• Sinking a Digital Output - The digital output common
3
(return) is connected to the power supply positive
4 voltage. The digital output is connect to the device to
5 be controlled and the device common is connected to
6 the power supply common.
7
Note:
8 Digital Inputs 1-3 can only be configured as sourcing
inputs. Digital Inputs 4-6 can be configured as sourcing or
Sinking Digital Inputs - Internal Power Supply sinking inputs.
Com
1
24V dc
2
3
4
9
5
10
6
11
7
12
8
13
14
15
16
Sinking Digital Output - Internal Power Supply

Com
1
24V dc
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Digital Inputs Sourcing Digital Inputs - Internal Power Supply, 2-Wire Control Required Parameter Changes
24V DC Com • Set the value of Par 829 [Dig In5 Sel] to a value of 7 -
1 “Run”
2
24V dc
• Par 153 [Control Options], bit 8 “3WireControl” will
3 automatically be off (0) for 2-wire control.
9 • Set Par 168 [Normal Stop Mode] for the desired
4
10
stopping mode:
5 0 = Ramp Stop
6 11 1 = CurLim Stop
7 12 2 = Coast Stop
8 13
14
15 Run
16 Enable
Digital Inputs Sourcing Digital Inputs- Internal Power Supply, 3-Wire • Set the value of Par 829 [Dig In5 Sel] to a value of 14 -
24V DC “Normal Stop”
1 Com
• Set Par 828 [Dig In4 Sel] to a value of 5 - “Start”
2 24V dc • Par 153 [Control Options], bit 8 “3WireControl” will
3 automatically be off (0) for 2-wire control.
9 • Set Par 168 [Normal Stop Mode] for the desired
4 stopping mode:
5 10 0 = Ramp Stop
6 11 1 = CurLim Stop
7 12 2 = Coast Stop
8 13
14 Start
15 Stop
16 Enable
Table I TB1 Terminals— Analog Wiring Examples

0-10V Analog Input 0-10V Analog Input - Internal Source Required Parameter Changes
na
13
1
14
2
15
3
16
4
17
5
18
6
19
7
20
8
21
9
22
10
23
11
24
12

0-10V Analog Input 0-10V Analog Input - Bi-Polar na
1 13
2 14
3 15
4 16
5 17
6 18
7 19
8 20
9 21
10 22
11 23
12 24
0-10V Analog Input 0-10V Analog Input - External Source Required Parameter Changes
1 -Signal or Source Common na
2 +Signal
3 Shield / Common
4 -Signal or Source Common
5
+Signal
6
Shield / Common
7
-Signal or Source Common
8
+Signal
9
10 Shield / Common
11
12
Analog Output 0-10V Analog Output Using Analog Out 1, -10V to + 10V to meter Motor
+/-10V DC RPM and direction:
1
• Send the data to the Analog Output
2
Used to drive analog Par 833 [Anlg Out1 Real] (the destination) linked to
3
meters displaying speed Par 71 [Filtered SpdFdbk] (the source)
4
and current 5
6
Par 835 [Anlg Out1 Scale] = 175 (Par 4 [Motor NP
7 - + RPM] = 1750 / 10V)
8 - +
9 Using Analog Out 2, -10V to + 10V to meter Motor

10 Current:
11 • Send the data to the Analog Output
12 Par 840 [Anlg Out2 Real] (the destination) linked to
Par 308 [Output Current] (the source)
Par 822 [Anlg Out2 Scale] = xx (Par 2 [Motor NP
FLA] / 10 V Output)

Primary Encoder Primary Encoder - Internal Supply Using Encoder 0 as speed feedback:
Interface - • Par 222 [Motor Fdkbk Sel] = 0 - “Encoder 0” (default)
Supports 5V/12V DC 13 • Par 232 [Encoder0 PPR] = Pulses/Rev for installed
differential encoders with 14 encoder
internal power supply. 15 Encoder
16 A
Used as primary closed 17 A-
loop speed feedback, 18 B
19 B-
20 Z
21 Z-
22 +
23 -
24
Primary Encoder - External Supply

13
14
15 Encoder
16 A
17 A-
18 B
19 B-
20 Z
21 Z-
22 +
23 -
24
Power +V
Common -V
Shield
Hard Enable Circuitry The PowerFlex 700S provides a dedicated hardware enable input for
applications that require the drive to be disabled without software
interpretation.
Auxiliary Power Supply You may use an auxiliary power supply to keep the 700S Control Assembly
energized, when input power is de-energized. This allows the Main Control
Board, DriveLogix controller and any feedback option cards to continue
operation. Connect auxiliary power to J15 on the Fiber Optic Interface
board. You must set parameter 153 [Control Options], bit 17 “Aux Pwr
Sply” to enable this feature.
Important: For drives manufactured prior to June 2006, the Voltage

Feedback board provides the bulk 24 volts for the Fiber Optic
Fiber Optic Interface board. If the auxiliary power supply (24
volts) is greater than the Voltage Feedback board (24 volts) then
the switch mode power supply on the Voltage Feedback board
will shut down. If the auxiliary power supply has an adjustable
voltage, then the voltage should be lowered (23.75). This will
allow the Voltage Feedback board power supply to supply the
24 volts. If the auxiliary power supply cannot be adjusted, then
a 500 ohm resistor needs to be added to the Voltage Feedback
board. In this case, please contact Drives Technical Support for
details.
Table 4.B Auxiliary Power Supply Specifications
Voltage Current (Min) Power (Min)
24V dc ± 5% 3A 75W
Figure 4.1 PowerFlex Fiber Optic Interface Board
J15 Auxiliary
Power Connector
Pin 1 (24V dc power)
Pin 3 (24V dc common)
DIP Switch Settings
ATTENTION: The DIP switches for Digital Inputs 4 - 6 are set

! to 24V DC at the factory. If you are running a 115V AC input
application, the switches must be set as indicated below before
applying power to the drive or damage to the Main Control board
may occur.
Figure 3 Main Control Board Dip Switches
JUMPER P22
4 3
= HW Enable
2 1
S1
SWITCH S5 4 3
= No HW Enable
2 1
SIDE VIEW FRONT
TOP VIEW
Up = Open = Off
1 2
Down = Closed = On
SWITCH S2
SIDE VIEW FRONT
TOP VIEW
Up = Open = Off
1 2 3 4
Down = Closed = On
SWITCH S4
SWITCH S3 SIDE VIEW FRONT
TOP VIEW
SIDE VIEW FRONT Up = Open = Off
TOP VIEW
Up = Open = Off
1 2
Down = Closed = On
1 2
Down = Closed = On
Table E Switch Settings

Function Default Switch Open Closed Notes
Configuring Digital pin 2-4 P22 pin 2-4 pin 1-3 No Jmpr = HW Enbl
Input 6 for Hardware HW Enbl Jumper HW Enbl No Enbl
Enable (HW Enbl)
Analog Input 1 Voltage S5-2 Voltage Current Change with Power Off
Analog Input 2 Voltage S5-1 Voltage Current Change with Power Off
Digital Inputs 4-6 24V DC S4-1, 115V AC 24V DC Change with Power Off
Voltage S4-2
Digital Input 1 24V DC S3-1 24V DC 12V DC Change with Power Off
Voltage
Digital Input 2 24V DC S3-2 24V DC 12V DC Change with Power Off
Voltage
Function Default Switch Open Closed Notes

Encoder Supply 12V DC S2-4 12V DC 5V DC Change with Power Off
Voltage
Encoder Signal A 12V DC S2-1 12V DC 5V DC Set all switches the same
Voltage
Encoder Signal B 12V DC S2-2 12V DC 5V DC
Voltage
Encoder Signal Z 12V DC S2-3 12V DC 5V DC
Voltage
Function Down Switch Up Center Notes
DriveLogix Run S1 Prog Remote Processor Mode
Processor
Please note there are two separate values for an encoder.

Chapter 5
Communication Options
Communication Module Figure 5.1 DPI Port Locations

Locations ➊
The HIM panel opens to allow

access to the DPI interface. To
open panel, remove screws on
left side of HIM panel and swing
open.
Back View
X2
➋➌ X1
➍
To Drive Control (Main Control
board on 700S , DPI Interface
board on 700H)
No. Connector Description

➊ DPI Port 1 HIM connection when installed in the drive.
➋ DPI Port 2 Cable connection for handheld and remote options.
➌ DPI Port 3 or 2 Splitter cable connected to DPI Port 2 provides additional port.
➍ DPI Port 5 Cable connection for communications adapter.
Note: DPI Port 4 is not available.

5-2 Communication Options
Communication Typical Programmable Controller Configurations

Configurations
Important: If block transfers are programmed to continuously write
information to the drive, care must be taken to properly format
the block transfer. If attribute 10 is selected for the block
transfer, values will be written only to RAM and will not be
saved by the drive. This is the preferred attribute for continuous
transfers. If attribute 9 is selected, each program scan will
complete a write to the drives non-volatile memory (EEprom).
Since the EEprom has a fixed number of allowed writes,
continuous block transfers will quickly damage the EEprom.
Do Not assign attribute 9 to continuous block transfers. Refer to
the individual communications adapter User Manual for details.
Logic Command/Status Words

Figure 5.2 PowerFlex 700H Logic Command Word
Logic Bits
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command Description
x Stop (1) 0 = Not Stop
1 = Stop
x Start (1)(2) 0 = Not Start
1 = Start
x Jog 0 = Not Jog
1 = Jog
x Clear Faults 0 = Not Clear Faults
1 = Clear Faults
x x Direction 00 = No Command
01 = Forward Command
10 = Reverse Command
11 = Hold Present Direction
x Local 0 = No Local Control
Control 1 = Local Control
x MOP 0 = Not Increment
Increment 1 = Increment
x x Accel Rate 00 = No Command
01 = Use Accel Time 1
10 = Use Accel Time 2
11 = Use Present Time
x x Decel Rate 00 = No Command
01 = Use Decel Time 1
10 = Use Decel Time 2
11 = Use Present Time
x x x Reference 000 = No Command
Select (3) 001 = Ref. 1 (Ref A Select)
010 = Ref. 2 (Ref B Select)
011 = Ref. 3 (Preset 3)
100 = Ref. 4 (Preset 4)
101 = Ref. 5 (Preset 5)
110 = Ref. 6 (Preset 6)
111 = Ref. 7 (Preset 7)
x MOP 0 = Not Decrement
Decrement 1 = Decrement
(1)
A “0 = Not Stop” condition (logic 0) must first be present before a “1 = Start” condition will start the drive. The
Start command acts as a momentary Start command. A “1” will start the drive, but returning to “0” will not stop
the drive.
(2) This Start will not function if a digital input (Pars 361-366) is programmed for 2-Wire Control (option 7, 8 or 9).
(3)
This Reference Select will not function if a digital input (Pars. 361-366) is programmed for “Speed Sel 1, 2 or 3”
(option 15, 16 or 17). Note that Reference Selection is “Exclusive Ownership.”
Communication Options 5-3
Figure 5.3 PowerFlex 700H Logic Status Word

Logic Bits
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Status Description
x Ready 0 = Not Ready
1 = Ready
x Active 0 = Not Active
1 = Active
x Command 0 = Reverse
Direction 1 = Forward
x Actual 0 = Reverse
x Accel 0 = Not Accelerating
1 = Accelerating
x Decel 0 = Not Decelerating
1 = Decelerating
x Alarm 0 = No Alarm
1 = Alarm
x Fault 0 = No Fault
1 = Fault
x At Speed 0 = Not At Reference
1 = At Reference
x x x Local 000 = Port 0 (TB)
Control (1) 001 = Port 1
010 = Port 2
011 = Port 3
100 = Port 4
101 = Port 5
110 = Reserved
111 = No Local
x x x x Reference 0000 = Ref A Auto
Source 0001 = Ref B Auto
0010 = Preset 2 Auto
1000 = Term Blk Manual
1001 = DPI 1 Manual
1010 = DPI 2 Manual
1011 = DPI 3 Manual
1100 = DPI 4 Manual
1101 = DPI 5 Manual
1110 = Reserved
1111 = Jog Ref
(1)
See “Owners” for further information.
Figure 5.4 PowerFlex 700S Logic Command Word

Logic Bits
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command Description
x Normal 0 = Not Normal Stop
Stop 1 = Normal Stop
x Start (1) 0 = Not Start
1 = Start
x Jog 1 0 = Not Jog using [Jog Speed 1]
1 = Jog using [Jog Speed 1]
x Clear 0 = Not Clear Fault
Fault(2) 1 = Clear Fault
x x Unipolar 00 = No Command
Direction 01 = Forward Command
10 = Reverse Command
11 = Hold Direction Control
x Reserved
x Jog 2 0 = Not Jog using [Jog Speed 2]
1 = Jog using [Jog Speed 2]
x Current 0 = Not Current Limit Stop
Limit Stop 1 = Current Limit Stop
x Coast Stop 0 = Not Coast to Stop
1 = Coast to Stop
x Reserved
x Reserved
x Spd Ref
Sel0
x Spd Ref Bits
Sel1
14 13 12
x Spd Ref
Sel2 0 0 0 = Spd Ref A
0 0 1 = Spd Ref B
0 1 0 = Preset 2
0 1 1 = Ref. 3 (Preset 3)
1 0 0 = Ref. 4 (Preset 4)
1 0 1 = Ref. 5 (Preset 5)
1 1 0 = Ref. 6 (Preset 6)
1 1 1 = Ref. 7 (Preset 7)
x Reserved
(1)
A Not Stop condition (logic bit 0 = 0, logic bit 8 = 0, and logic bit 9 = 0) must first be present before a 1 = Start
condition will start the drive.
(2)
To perform this command, the value must switch from “0” to “1.”
Communication Options 5-5
Figure 5.5 PowerFlex 700S Logic Status Word

Logic Bits
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Status Description
x Active 0 = Not Active
1 = Active
x Running 0 = Not Running
1 = Running
x Command 0 = Reverse
x Actual 0 = Reverse
x Accel 0 = Not Accelerating
1 = Accelerating
x Decel 0 = Not Decelerating
1 = Decelerating
x Jogging 0 = Not Jogging
1 = Jogging
x Fault 0 = No Fault
1 = Fault
x Alarm 0 = No Alarm
1 = Alarm
x Flash Mode 0 = Not in Flash Mode
1 = In Flash Mode
x Run Ready 0 = Not Ready to Run
1 = Ready to Run
x At Limit(1) 0 = Not At Limit
1 = At Limit
x Tach Loss 0 = Not Tach Loss Sw
Sw 1 = Tach Loss Sw
x At Zero Spd 0 = Not At Zero Speed
1 = At Zero Speed
x At Setpt 0 = Not At Setpoint Speed
Spd 1= At Setpoint Speed
x Enable 0 = Not Enabled
1 = Enabled
(1)
See Parameter 304 - [Limit Status] in the PowerFlex 700S drive for a description of the limit status conditions.
Notes:
Chapter 6
Frame 9 Installation
Most start-up difficulties are the result of incorrect wiring. Every precaution
must be taken to assure that the wiring is done as instructed. All information
in Chapter 1 “General Installation Information” and in this chapter must be
read and understood before the actual installation begins.
ATTENTION: The following information is merely a guide for

! proper installation. Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume
responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any
code, national, local or otherwise for the proper installation of
this drive or associated equipment. A hazard of personal injury
and/or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during
installation.
6-2 Frame 9 Installation
Minimum Mounting
Clearances
400.0 mm 400.0 mm
(15.75 in.) (15.75 in.)
50.0 mm 80.0 mm 50.0 mm

(1.97 in.) (3.2 in.) (1.97 in.)
350.0 mm 350.0 mm
(13.8 in.) (13.8 in.)
Refer to Figure 6.1 for detailed dimension information.
Operating Temperatures Frame 9 drives require a minimum of 1300 m3/h (765 cfm) of cooling air.
Surrounding Air Temperature
PowerFlex Drive Voltage Class Amp Rating Normal Duty Heavy Duty
700H All All 0 to 40° C 0 to 50° C
(32 to 104° F) (32 to 122° F)
700S 400/480V AC All 0 to 40° C 0 to 40° C
(540/650V DC) (32 to 104° F) (32 to 104° F)
600/690V AC 170 0 to 40° C 0 to 40° C
(810/932V DC) (32 to 104° F) (32 to 104° F)
208 0 to 35° C 0 to 40° C
(32 to 95° F) (32 to 104° F)
Frame 9 Installation 6-3
Nameplate Location Refer to Figure 6.1 below.
Dimensions Figure 6.1 Frame 9 Dimensions
480.0 (18.90)
5.0 (0.20) 400.0 (15.75) 363.3 (14.32)
14.0 (0.55) 240.0 (9.45) 9.0 (0.35) 339.5 (13.37)
45.0 (1.77)
Mounting Holes Nameplate Lifting Holes
Wire Way
1150.0
(45.28)
1120.0
(44.09)
Nameplate
Mounting Holes
9.0 (0.35)
Lifting Hole
21.0 (0.83)
372.5 (14.67) 245.53

292.5 (11.52) (9.67)
142.5 (5.61) 59.0 (2.32)
62.5 (2.46) 191.64
(7.54) 100.12
(3.94)
285.0
(11.22)
Detail A
Brake Option Top Hat
Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).

Lifting and Mounting Frame Refer to Appendix B - Lifting and Mounting Instructions for detailed
9 Drives instructions.
Removing the Protective

Covers
Removing the Connection

Cover
(8 Screws)
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
(8 Screws) Removing the Power

Cover
(3 Screws)
Removing the Conduit

Cover
Ungrounded, Unbalanced or CE frame 9 drives are equipped with common mode capacitors that are
High Resistive Ground referenced to ground. Operating a CE frame 9 drive on a resistive ground or
Installations ungrounded distribution system could result in drive damage.
ATTENTION: If you intend to operate a Frame 9 drive on a

! resistive ground or ungrounded distribution system, you must
order a non-CE PowerFlex drive.
Power Wiring Table 6.A Frame 9 Power Terminal Specifications

Wire Size Range (1) Torque
No. Name Description Maximum Minimum Recommended
➊ Input Power Terminal Block (2) Input power 185.0 mm2 95.0 mm2 40 N•m
L1, L2, L3 (350 MCM) (4/0 AWG) (354 lb•in)
➋ Output Power Terminal Block (2) Motor connections 185.0 mm2 95.0 mm2 40 N•m
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (350 MCM) (4/0 AWG) (354 lb•in)
➌ SHLD Terminal, PE, Motor Ground Terminating point for wiring shields 95.0 mm2 5.0 mm2 22 N•m
(4/0 AWG) (10 AWG) (195 lb•in)
➍ DC Bus (3) DC input or external brake resistor 185.0 mm2 95.0 mm2 40 N•m
(2 Terminals; DC–, DC+) (Internal Brake option not provided - Refer to Frame (350 MCM) (4/0 AWG) (354 lb•in)
9 DC Bus/Brake Connections on page 6-6.)
DC Bus w/Brake (3) DC input/internal brake 185.0 mm2 95.0 mm2 40 N•m
(3 Terminals; DC–, DC+/R+, R–) (Internal Brake option is provided - Refer to Frame 9 (350 MCM) (4/0 AWG) (354 lb•in)
DC Bus/Brake Connections on page 6-6.)
➎ Cable Clamp for Shield
(1)
(2)
Do Not exceed maximum wire size. Parallel connections may be required.
(3) DC terminal and brake lugs can be removed.
Figure 6.2 Terminal Locations and Power Terminal Block

D
C
AC Line Input Power To Motor Leads –
D
C
+
/R
+
R
–
➊ ➋
➌
DC-, DC+/R+, R-
terminals shown with
protective cover removed.
D
C
–
D
C
+
/R
+
R
–
➎
Frame 9 DC Bus/Brake Connections

Figure 6.3 Connecting to DC Source Only (No Brake Option Ordered)
DC Source
DC– DC+/ R–
R+
Figure 6.4 Connecting to an External Brake Resistor (Brake Option Ordered)

See Table 6.B on page 6-7 for brake
resistor sizing information.
DB Resistor
DC– DC+/ R–
R+
Figure 6.5 Connecting to an External Braking IGBT and Resistor (No Brake Option
Ordered)
DB Resistor
Braking IGBT
DC– DC+/ R–
R+
Table 6.B Frame 9 Brake Resistor Ratings

Maximum
Drive Brake Resistor
Catalog Cont. Output Current Nominal
Input Voltage Number ND Rating (Amps) (Amps) (Ohms)
400V AC 20DC261 132 kW 261 222 3.3
20DC300 160 kW 300 222 3.3
480V AC 20DD261 200 HP 261 222 3.3
20DD300 250 HP 300 222 3.3
600V AC 20DE170 150 HP 170 157.1 7
20DE208 200 HP 208 157.1 7
690V AC 20DF170 160 kW 170 157.1 7
20DF208 200 kW 208 157.1 7
Routing for I/O Wiring and

Communication Cabling
Network Communication Cabling
700S 700H
Control Wiring
Notes:
Chapter 7

installation.
Minimum Mounting Figure 7.1 Enclosure Codes: A (NEMA/UL Type 1, IP21), M (NEMA/UL Type 1, IP21 w/
Conformal Coat), H (NEMA/UL Type 12, IP54) and W (NEMA/UL Type 12, IP54 w/
Clearances Conformal Coat)
200 mm
(7.87 in.) Min. Enclosure Code A (NEMA/
UL Type 1, IP21) Shown
800 mm
(31.50 in.) Min.
Figure 7.2 Enclosure Code B (NEMA/UL Type 1, IP21) and K (NEMA/UL Type 1, IP21
w/Conformal Coat)
200 mm
(7.87 in.) Min.
Powerful Performance, Flexible Control.
838 mm
(33.0 in.) Min.
700H & 700S 400/480V AC All 0 to 40° C 0 to 40° C
(540/650V DC) (32 to 104° F) (32 to 104° F)
600/690V AC 261, 325, 385 0 to 40° C 0 to 40° C
(810/932V DC) (32 to 104° F) (32 to 104° F)
600/690V AC 416 0 to 35° C 0 to 40° C
(810/932V DC) (32 to 95° F) (32 to 104° F)
Dimensions Figure 7.3 Enclosure Code A (NEMA/UL Type 1, IP21) and M (NEMA/UL Type 1, IP21
w/Conformal Coat)
* This dimension is the depth for drives with

the optional door-mounted HIM installed.
632.5*
(24.90)
606.0
(23.85) 605.5
(23.84)
534.7 32.3
(21.05) 498.0 42.0
(1.27) (19.61) (1.65)
Lifting Holes
2234.0
2275.0 (87.95)
(89.57)
2201.8
(86.68)
144.5 439 83 (3.3)

(5.7) (17.3)
73.3 (2.9) Stationary metal front bottom plate
Max. Two pieces of soft foam taped to adjacent metal plates
116 (4.5) Overlapping metal bottom plate (slightly adjustable)
Gap with 57.2 Stationary metal back bottom plate
Overlapping (2.3)
Plate Removed Standard
Wire entry for this enclosure is between two pieces of soft foam. If the adjustable plate is slid back, a gap
develops between the foam pieces. Otherwise, the foam acts as a loose gasket around the wires.
Figure 7.4 Enclosure Code B (NEMA/UL Type 1, IP20 MCC) and K (NEMA/UL Type 1,
IP20 MCC w/Conformal Coat)
Removeable Lifting Angle
63.5
(2.5)
Powerful Performance, Flexible Control.
2286
(90.0)
635
635 (25.0)
(25.0)
50.8
(2.0) 533.4
(21.0)
241.3
(9.5)
548.6 Area available for conduit routing
(21.6)
43.2 0.625 Dia. - 6 Mounting Holes

295.5 295.5
(1.7) (11.75) (11.75)
19.0
(0.75)
Figure 7.5 Enclosure Code H (NEMA/UL Type 12 - IP54) and W (NEMA/UL Type 12 -
IP54 w/Conformal Coat)
NEMA/UL Type 12 Roof

Assembly w/Filters
655.04
(25.8)
478
(19) 454
(18)
198.5
(7.8)
2403.5
(94.6)
NEMA/UL
Type 12
External
Filters
606
(24)
144.5 83 (3.3)
(5.7) 439 (17.3)
Stationary metal front bottom plate
73.3 (2.9) Two pieces of soft foam taped to adjacent metal plates
Max.
Overlapping metal bottom plate (slightly adjustable)
116 (4.5) Stationary metal back bottom plate
Gap with 57.2
Overlapping (2.3)
10 Drives instructions on lifting and mounting the drive. When you have completed
the instructions in Appendix B, continue with the installation as directed
below.
Removing the Protective Moving the Control Frame

Covers
To gain access to the power wiring terminals, airflow plate and protective
covers you may need to move the Control Frame out of the way. If you do
not need to move the control frame, continue with "Removing the Airflow
Plate" on page 7-7.
Task Description
A Loosen the T8 Torx-head screws that secure the Control Frame to the drive enclosure
(Remove screws on early frame 10 drives).
B Swing the Control Frame out and away from the power structure.
or
Frame 10 drives, from early production runs, have

B holes instead of slots for these screws. You must
completely remove the screws from these drives in
order to swing-open the control frame.
Removing the Airflow Plate

The drive is equipped with a plate, just above the Control Frame, that directs
air flow through the drive. You may need to remove this plate in order to
access the protective covers and the power terminals. If you do not need to
remove the airflow plate, continue with "Removing the Protective
Covers" on page 7-8.
Task Description
A Remove the T8 Torx-head screws that secure the airflow plate to the drive.
B Slide the airflow plate off of the drive.
B
A
Removing the Protective Covers

You must remove the protective covers to gain access to the power structure.
Task Description
A Remove the four M5 POZIDRIV screws that secure the top and bottom protective covers to
the main front protective cover, then remove the top and bottom protective covers.
Note: you only need to remove the top and bottom covers to gain access to the power
terminals. You can remove the other covers without removing the top and bottom ones.
B Remove the four M5 POZIDRIV screws that secure the main front protective cover to the
drive, then remove the protective cover.
C Remove the side protective covers.
C
A
A
B
A
Ungrounded, High Resistive Frame 10 size drives are equipped with common mode capacitors and
Ground or Grounded B capacitors that are connected to the input terminals. To guard against drive
Phase Delta Installations damage, these capacitors should be disconnected depending upon the type
of ground system on which the drive is installed.
Installation on an Ungrounded Distribution System or High Resistive

Ground
If you are installing a 400/480V AC input drive on an ungrounded
distribution system or high resistive ground, you:
• Must move the common mode jumper to the disconnected position -

refer to "Move the Common Mode Jumper to the Disconnected
Position" on page 7-11.
• Should insulate terminal X4 on the Rectifier circuit board- refer to
"Insulate Terminal X4 on the Rectifier Circuit Board" on page 7-12.
• Must disconnect the small capacitors from the input terminals - refer to
"Disconnect the Small Capacitors from the Input Terminals" on
page 7-13.

distribution system or high resistive ground you:

• Must insulate terminal X4 on the Rectifier circuit board- refer to
page 7-13.
Installation on a Grounded B Phase Delta System

If you are installing a drive on a grounded B phase Delta system you:

page 7-13.
Note: Refer to Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width

Modulated (PWM) AC Drives - Installation Instructions,
publication DRIVES-IN001…, for additional information on an
ungrounded distribution system or high resistive ground
installation.
Figure 7.6 Common Mode Jumper and Rectifier Circuit Board Location
Common
Mode jumper
Front View
of Assembly
There is one common

mode jumper located on
the upper-right side of the
power structure.
Rectifier Circuit Board
Control Frame not shown for clarity only.

Move the Common Mode Jumper to the Disconnected Position

Follow the lettered steps below to move the common mode jumper to the
disconnected position (refer to Figure 7.6 for jumper location):
Task Description
A Loosen the upper screw.
B Remove the lower screw.

Move the jumper to the horizontal position.
C
D Install and tighten the screws.
Front View of
Power Structure D
A
B Rectifier Circuit Board

Insulate Terminal X4 on the Rectifier Circuit Board

Follow the lettered steps below to insulate terminal X4 on the Rectifier
circuit board (refer to Figure 7.6 for Rectifier board location):
Task Description
A Remove the screw from the X4 connection on the Rectifier circuit board.
B Insulate the top and bottom of the X4 connection on the Rectifier circuit board.
Important: Do not install the screw and washer that was removed from this
connection.
A Side View of Power Structure B
X4 X4
X1 X1
X41 X41

Disconnect the Small Capacitors from the Input Terminals

Follow the lettered steps below to disconnect the small capacitors from the
input terminals:
Task Description
A Remove the screws and lock washers that secure each of the three capacitor supply wires
to the input power terminals.
B Insulate the capacitor leads and leave disconnected.
Install and tighten the screws and lock washers only.
C
Important: Do not re-install the capacitor leads.
Important: It is not necessary to remove the power

wiring from the terminals in order to L3
insulate the capacitor leads.
L1 L2
Front View of Input

Input power terminal Power Terminals
Side View of Input

Power Terminals
Insulator
B A
Capacitor
Capacitor lead -
leave disconnected C
Power Wiring Important: Once power wiring has been completed, the protective covers
must be installed before energizing the drive. Installation is in
reverse order of removal (refer to "Removing the Protective
Covers" on page 7-6.)
Table 7.A Power Terminal Specifications

Wire Size Range (1)(2) Torque
No. Name Description Maximum Minimum Recommended Terminal Bolt Size (3)(4)
➊ Input Power Terminal Block (3) Input power 300 mm2 2.1 mm2 40 N•m M12
L1, L2, L3 (600 MCM) (14 AWG) (354 lb•in)
➋ Output Power Terminal Block (3) Motor connections 300 mm2 2.1 mm2 40 N•m M12
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (600 MCM) (14 AWG) (354 lb•in)
➌ SHLD Terminal, PE, Motor Ground (3) Terminating point for wiring shields 300 mm2 2.1 mm2 40 N•m M10
(600 MCM) (14 AWG) (354 lb•in)
➍ DC Bus (3) DC input or external brake 300 mm2 2.1 mm2 40 N•m M12
(2 Terminals; DC–, DC+) (600 MCM) (14 AWG) (354 lb•in)
(1)
(2)
(3) These connections are bus bar type terminations and require the use of lug type connectors.
(4)
Apply counter torque to the nut on the other side of terminations when tightening or loosening the terminal bolt in order to avoid damage to the terminal.
Figure 7.7 Terminal Locations
DC-
DC+
➍
V/T2
Cat No.
FIELD INSTALLED OPTIONS:
1234567890-*
1234567890-*
DANGER
DC BUS CONDUCTORS AND CAPACITORS
OPERATE AT HIGH VOLTAGE. REMOVE POWER
AND WAIT 5 MINUTES BEFORE SERVICING
U/T1 W/T3
➋
L1
L2
➊ L3
➎
➌
Chapter 8

installation.
Minimum Mounting Figure 8.1 Enclosure Codes: A (NEMA/UL Type 1, IP21), M (NEMA/UL Type 1, IP21 w/
200 mm Enclosure Code A (NEMA/UL

(7.87 in.) Min. Type 1 - IP21) shown
800 mm
(39.3 in.) Min.
w/Conformal Coat)
200 mm
(7.87 in.) Min.
838 mm
(33.0 in.) Min.
700H All All 0 to 40° C 0 to 40° C
(32 to 104° F) (32 to 104° F)
700S 400/480V AC All 0 to 40° C 0 to 40° C
(540/650V DC) (32 to 104° F) (32 to 104° F)
600/690V AC 460, 502 0 to 40° C 0 to 40° C
(810/932V DC) (32 to 104° F) (32 to 104° F)
600/690V AC 590 0 to 35° C 0 to 35° C
(810/932V DC) (32 to 95° F) (32 to 95° F)
Dimensions Figure 8.3 Enclosure Code A NEMA/UL Type 1 - IP21 and M (NEMA/UL Type 1, IP21 w/
Conformal Coat)

797.0 621.74*
(31.38) (24.48)
736.0 605.5
(28.98) (23.84)
32.25 42.0
498.0
(1.27) (1.65)
(19.61)
! DANGER
2275.0 2234.0
(89.57) (87.95)
2205.0
(86.81)
640 83
144.5 (25.2) (3.3)
(5.7)
153.5 (6.0) Overlapping metal bottom plate (slightly adjustable)
Gap with 57.2 Stationary metal back bottom plate
Overlapping (2.3)
Figure 8.4 Enclosure Code B (NEMA/UL Type 1, IP20 MCC) and K (NEMA/UL Type 1,
IP20 MCC w/Conformal Coat)
Removable Lifting Angle
63.5 (2.5)
2286
(90.0)
635
889
(25.0)
(35.0)
50.8 787
(2.0) (31.0)
241.3
(9.5) Area available for conduit routing
548.6
(21.6)
425.5 425.5
43.2 15.88 (0.625) Dia. - 6 Mounting Holes
(16.75) (16.75)
(1.7)
19.0
(0.75)
Figure 8.5 Enclosure Code H (NEMA/UL Type 12, IP54) and W (NEMA/UL Type 12 -
655.04
(25.8)
678 454
(26.7) NEMA/UL Type (18.0)
12 Roof
213
(8.4) Assembly (1)
2414.5
(95.0)
NEMA/UL
Type 12
External Filters
806
(31.7)
640 83
144.5 (25.2) (3.3)
(5.7)

Max.
Two pieces of soft foam taped to adjacent metal plates
153.5 (6.0)
Gap with 57.2
Stationary metal back bottom plate
Overlapping (2.3)
(1) NEMA/UL Type 12/IP54 Roof Assembly is 242 mm (9.5 in.) for Frame 11, 400V 730A
and 600V, 590A drives. For these drives, the total height of the drive is 2443.5 mm
(104.5 in.).
the instructions in Appendix B, continue with the installation as directedd
below.

Covers
Plate" on page 8-7.
Task Description
A Loosen the T8 Torx-head screws that secure the Control Frame to the drive enclosure.
B

Task Description
A

You must remove the protective covers to gain access to the power
terminals.
Task Description
B
A
A
!
Risk DA
Disc of elec
NG
veri onnect tric sho
ER
fy
Foll DC power, ck and
ow bus
Ear inst volt wait dea
th grouruct age 5 min th.
ions befo utes
nd
requ in man re serv and
ired ual icin
. befo g.
re
use
.
A
B
A
Ungrounded, High Resistive Frame 11 size drives are equipped with common mode capacitors. To guard
Ground or Grounded B against drive damage, these capacitors should be disconnected depending
Phase Delta Installations upon the type of ground system on which the drive is installed.

Ground




If you are installing a drive on a grounded B phase Delta system, you:

installation.
There is one jumper located on Common

each Rectifying Module. The Mode jumper
Rectifying Modules are located on Front View
the upper-right side of the center of Assembly
and right side power stack of the
drive’s power structure.
Control Frame not shown for clarity only


Task Description

C
Front View of
Power Structure D
A


Task Description
connection.
X4 X4
X1 X1
X41 X41

Power Wiring AC Input Wiring

The table below identifies which frame 11 drives contain only one
rectifying module and which frame 11 drives contain two rectifying
modules. Drives with one rectifying module contain only one set of input
power terminals. Drives with two parallel rectifying modules contain two
sets of input power terminals--you must supply power to both sets of input
terminals on these drives. There are several methods for accomplishing this.
Each of these methods is shown below.
Number of
Voltage Class Amps Rectifiers
400/480V AC Input 590 2
650 2
730 2
600/690V AC Input 460 1
502 1
590 2
Important: Parallel wiring must have the same cable dimensions, type and
routing. Non-symmetrical wiring may cause unequal loading
between the converters and reduce the drive’s ability to deliver
current to the motor.
Figure 8.1 AC Wiring Example: Two Fuses per Phase
L1 L2 L3
AC Input Power Wiring, Fuses, and

Disconnect Device Provided by
Customer
1L1 1L2 1L3 2L1 2L2 2L3
AC Input Power Terminals

Inside Drive
Figure 8.2 AC Wiring Example: One Fuse per Phase

L1 L2 L3
1L1 1L2 1L3 2L1 2L2 2L3
Figure 8.3 AC Wiring Example: Circuit Breaker

L1 L2 L3
1L1 1L2 1L3 2L1 2L2 2L3
Important: Once power wiring has been completed, the protective covers
Table 8.A Power Terminal Specifications

➊ Input Power Terminal Block (3) AC Input power 300 mm2 2.1 mm2 40 N•m M12
1L1, 1L2, 1L3, 2L1, 2L2, 2L3 (600 MCM) (14 AWG) (354 lb•in)
(600 MCM) (14 AWG) (354 lb•in)

(1)
(2)
(4)

➍
DC+
DC-
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
1L1 1L3 2L1 2L3

1L2 2L2
➊ ➎
Note: 600V AC input, 460A and 502A frame 11
drives only have one set of Input Power Terminals.
Notes:
Chapter 9

installation.
Minimum Mounting Figure 9.1 Enclosure Codes A (NEMA/UL Type 1, IP21), M (NEMA/UL Type 1, IP21 w/
200 mm
(8.00 in.) Min.
Enclosure Code A (NEMA/
UL Type 1, IP21) Shown
800 mm
(31.5 in.) Min.
w/Conformal Coat)
200 mm
(8.0 in.) Min.
Powerful Performance, Flexible Control. Powerful Performance, Flexible Control.
838 mm
(33.0 in.) Min.
PowerFlex Surrounding Air Temperature

Drive Voltage Class Amp Rating Normal Duty Heavy Duty
700H 400/480V AC 820, 920 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° F)
(540/650V DC) F)
400/480V AC 1030 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° 0 to 35° C (32 to 95° F)
(540/650V DC) F)
600/690V AC 820, 920 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° F)
(810/932V DC) F)
600/690V AC 1030 0 to 35° C (32 to 95° F) 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° F)
(810/932V DC)
700S 400/480V AC 820, 920 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° F)
(540/650V DC) F)
400/480V AC 1030 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° 0 to 35° C (32 to 95° F)
(540/650V DC) F)
600/690V AC 820, 920 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° F)
(810/932V DC) F)
(810/932V DC)
Dimensions Figure 9.3 Enclosure Code A (NEMA/UL Type 1 - IP21) and M (NEMA/UL Type 1, IP21
w/Conformal Coat)

632.5*
(24.90)
1205.05
(47.45) 605.5
(23.84)
534.7 32.3
(21.05) 498.0 42.0
(1.27) (19.61) (1.65)
2234.0
2275.0
(87.95)
(89.57)
2202.75
(86.72)
87.9
(3.5)
144.5 439
(5.7) (17.3)
Max.
Gap with Stationary metal back bottom plate
57.2
Overlapping
(2.3) Standard
Plate Removed
w/Conformal Coat)
Removeable Lifting Angle
63.5
(2.5)
Powerful Performance, Flexible Control. Powerful Performance, Flexible Control.
2286
(90.0)
635
635 635
(25.0)
(25.0) (25.0)
1270
(50.0)
50.8
(2.0) 533.4
(21.0)
241.3
(9.5)
548.6 Area available for conduit routing
(21.6)
43.2 15.88 (0.625) Dia. - 6 Mounting Holes

295.5 295.5
(1.7) (11.75) (11.75)
19.0
(0.75)
Figure 9.5 Enclosure Code H (NEMA/UL Type 12, IP54) and W (NEMA/UL Type 12,
NEMA/UL
478 478 655.04
(18.8) (18.8) Type 12 Roof (25.8)
(4.8) 454
Assembly (17.9)
198.5 (7.8)
2403.5
(94.6)
NEMA/UL
Type 12
External
Filters
1205.05
87.9
(3.5)
144.5 439
(5.7) (17.3)
Gap with Stationary metal back bottom plate
57.2
Overlapping
(2.3) Standard
Plate Removed
below.

Covers
Plate" on page 9-7.
Task Description
A Loosen the T8 Torx-head screws that secure the Control Frame to the drive enclosure
(Remove screws on early frame 10 drives).
B

Task Description
B
A

You must remove the protective covers to gain access to the Power
structure.
Task Description
Note: you only need to remove the top and bottom covers to gain access to the power
terminals. You can remove the other covers without removing the top and bottom ones.
C Remove the side protective covers.
C
A
A
B
A
Ungrounded, High Resistive Frame 12 size drives are equipped with common mode capacitors and
Ground or Grounded B capacitors that are connected to the input terminals. To guard against drive
Phase Delta Installations damage, these capacitors should be disconnected depending upon the type
of ground system on which the drive is installed.

Ground

page 9-13.


page 9-13.


page 9-13.

installation.
Common
Mode jumper
There is one jumper located on

Front View
each Rectifying Module. The
of Assembly
Rectifying Modules are located on
the upper-right side of the right side
power stack of in each enclosure of
the drive’s power structure.
DANGER DANGER
DC BUS CONDUCTORS AND CAPACITORS DC BUS CONDUCTORS AND CAPACITORS
OPERATE AT HIGH VOLTAGE. REMOVE POWER OPERATE AT HIGH VOLTAGE. REMOVE POWER
AND WAIT 5 MINUTES BEFORE SERVICING AND WAIT 5 MINUTES BEFORE SERVICING


Task Description

C
Front View of
Power Structure D
A


Task Description
connection.
X4 X4
X1 X1
X41 X41

Disconnect the Small Capacitors from the Input Terminals

Follow the lettered steps below to disconnect the small capacitors from the
input terminals:
Task Description
A Remove the screws and lock washers that secure each of the three capacitor supply wires
to the input power terminals.
B Insulate the capacitor leads and leave disconnected.
Install and tighten the screws and lock washers only.
C
Important: Do not re-install the capacitor leads.
Important: It is not necessary to remove the power

wiring from the terminals in order to L3
insulate the capacitor leads.
L1 L2
Front View of Input

Input power terminal Power Terminals
Side View of Input

Power Terminals
Insulator
B A
Capacitor
Capacitor lead -
leave disconnected C
Power Wiring Input Power Wiring

Frame 12 drives utilize two parallel power structures, and therefore have
two sets of AC input power terminals. You must supply power to both sets
of input terminals. There are several methods for accomplishing this.
Figure 9.4 Frame 12 AC Wiring Example: Two Fuses per Phase
L1 L2 L3
AC Input Power Wiring, Fuses, and

Disconnect Device Provided by
Customer
1L1 1L2 1L3 2L1 2L2 2L3

Inside Drive
Figure 9.5 Frame 12 AC Wiring Example: One Fuse per Phase

L1 L2 L3
1L1 1L2 1L3 2L1 2L2 2L3
Figure 9.6 Frame 12 AC Wiring Example: Circuit Breaker

L1 L2 L3
1L1 1L2 1L3 2L1 2L2 2L3

Output Power Wiring

two sets of output power terminals. You must connect the motor to both sets
of output power terminals.
Important: The minimum cable length for parallel motor cables from the
drive to the point where the cables connect is 5m (16.4 ft). Join
the parallel cables at the motor end (not the drive end). Or,
install a reactor on the output of each power module with a
minimum of 5 µH prior to joining the parallel cables at the
motor end.
Figure 9.7 Frame 12 Motor Wiring Example
1T1 1T2 1T3 PE 2T1 2T2 2T3 PE
5m
minimum
Motor
Motor Frame
Table 9.A Frame 12 Power Terminal Specifications

Wire Size Range (1)(2) Torque Terminal Bolt Size
(3)(4)
No. Name Description Maximum Minimum Recommended
1L1, 1L2, 1L3, 2L1, 2L2, 2L3 (600 MCM) (14 AWG) (354 lb•in)
➋ Output Power Terminal Block ((3) Motor connections 300 mm2 2.1 mm2 40 N•m M12
1U/1T1, 1V/1T2, 1W/1T3, (600 MCM) (14 AWG) (354 lb•in)
2U/2T1, 2V/2T2, 2W/2T3
(600 MCM) (14 AWG) (354 lb•in)
(1)
(2) Do Not exceed maximum wire size. Parallel connections may be required.
(3)
These connections are bus bar type terminations and require the use of lug type connectors.
(4)
DC- DC+ DC- DC+

➍ ➍
1V/T2 2V/T2
Cat No.
FIELD INSTALLED OPTIONS:
1234567890-*
DANGER DANGER
DC BUS CONDUCTORS AND CAPACITORS
DC BUS CONDUCTORS AND CAPACITORS OPERATE AT HIGH VOLTAGE. REMOVE POWER
OPERATE AT HIGH VOLTAGE. REMOVE POWER AND WAIT 5 MINUTES BEFORE SERVICING
AND WAIT 5 MINUTES BEFORE SERVICING
1U/T1 ➋1W/T3 2U/T1 2W/T3

➋
1L1 2L1
➊ 1L2 ➊ 2L2
1L3 ➎ 2L3 ➎
Enclosure Style A Shown
➌
Notes:
Chapter 10

installation.
Minimum Mounting
Clearances
200 mm
(8.0 in.) Min.
800 mm
(31.50 in.) Min.
1600 mm, Style “A” Enclosure Shown.
Operating Temperatures Frame 13 drives require a minimum of 4200 m3/h (2472 cfm) of cooling air
for the Inverter unit and 1150 m3/h (677 cfm) of cooling air for each
Converter unit.

700H All All 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° F) 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° F)
700S 400/480V AC All 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° F) 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° F)
(540/650V DC)
600/690V AC 920, 1030 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° F) 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° F)
(810/932V DC)
(810/932V DC)
Dimensions Figure 10.1 Enclosure Code A (NEMA/UL Type 1, IP21) and M (NEMA/UL Type 1, IP21
w/Conformal Coat)
A 619.2
(24.4)
B 603
(23.7)
C 44
(1.73)
2275
(89.6)
2197
(86.5)
2231
(87.8)
1108.25
(43.6)
Wire entry for this enclosure is

between two pieces of soft foam.
If the adjustable plate is slid back,
a gap develops between the foam
pieces. otherwise, the foam acts
D E as a loose gasket around the
65 wires.
(2.6)

535 Stationary metal back bottom plate
(21.1)
Table 10.A Frame 13 Dimensions for Enclosure Code A (NEMA/UL Type 1, IP21) and
M (NEMA/UL Type 1, IP21 w/Conformal Coat)
Voltage Class Amps A B C D E F
400/480V AC 1150 1412 (56) 1329 (52) 1264 (50) 535 (21) 735 (29) 1264 (50)
(540/650V DC) 1300
1600 (63) 1529 (60) 1464 (58) 735 (29) 735 (29) 1464 (58)
1450
600/690V AC 920
(810/932V DC) 1030 1412 (56) 1329 (52) 1264 (50) 535 (21) 735 (29) 1264 (50)
1180
Dimensions are in mm and (in.)
Figure 10.2 Enclosure Code H (NEMA/UL Type 12, IP54) and W (NEMA/UL Type 12,
A
NEMA/UL
B C 662
Type 12 Roof
D 122 454
Assembly
NEMA/UL
Type 12
External
Filters
Wire entry for this enclosure is

between two pieces of soft foam.
If the adjustable plate is slid back,
a gap develops between the foam
pieces. otherwise, the foam acts
F G as a loose gasket around the
65 wires.

535 Stationary metal back bottom plate
H Ø13
2 PLACES
Table 10.B Frame 13 Dimensions for Enclosure Code H (NEMA/UL Type 12 - IP54) and
W (NEMA/UL Type 12, IP54 w/Conformal Coat)
Voltage Class Amps A B C D E F G H
400/480V AC 1150 1 @ 242 (9.5) 2443.5
1412 (56) 478 (18.8) 678 (26.7) 535 (21) 735 (29) 1264 (50)
(540/650V DC) 1 @ 213 (8.4) (104.5) max.
1300 2443.5
1600 (63) 678 (26.7) 678 (26.7) 2 @ 242 (9.5) 735 (29) 735 (29) 1464 (58)
1450 (104.5)
600/690V AC 920
(810/932V DC) 1 @ 242 (9.5) 2443.5
1030 1412 (56) 478 (18.8) 678 (26.7) 535 (21) 735 (29) 1264 (50)
1 @ 213 (8.4) (104.5) max.
1180
Lifting and Mounting Frame Enclosed Frame 13 Drives with DC Input

13 Drives
Enclosed Frame 13 drives with DC input are shipped with the control pan
mounted in the motor connection area of the right-hand enclosure. The
control pan must be moved from this location to a location in the adjacent
enclosure, away from the power connections.
Refer to Appendix B - Lifting and Mounting Instructions for detailed

instructions on lifting and mounting the drive. When you have completed
below.
To access and move the common mode jumper(s) and disconnect the
capacitor connections you must first move the Control frame and remove
the protective covers from the Converter unit. These steps are detailed on
the following pages.
installation.
Rectifier Front View
board of Assembly Converter Inverter
Unit Unit
Common
Mode
Jumper
There is one jumper for each
Rectifier module. The Rectifier
modules and jumpers are located
on the left side of the power stack
on the drive’s rectifying structure
(left side enclosure).

Covers from the Converter
You must move the Control Frame in order to access and remove the
Unit protective covers from the drive’s Converter unit.
Task Description
B Swing the Control Frame out and away from the converter unit.
B

You must remove the protective covers from the converter unit to gain
access to the common mode jumper(s) and Rectifier circuit board.
Task Description
A Remove the four M5 POZIDRIV screws that secure each of the two or three main and
bottom protective covers to the drive, then remove the protective covers.
DC
OP BUS !
AN ERAT COND DA
DW E
N
AIT AT HIUCTO GE
5 M GH RS
INUTVO AN R
ES LTAGD CA
BE E. REPA
FO CI
RE MOVTORS
SE E
RV PO
ICIN WER
G
DC
OP BUS !
AN ERAT COND DA
DW E
N
AIT AT HIUCTO GE
5 M GH RS
INUTVO AN R
ES LTAGD CA
BE E. REPA
FO CI
RE MOVTORS
SE E
RV PO
ICIN WER
G
DC
OP BUS !
AN ERAT COND DA
DW E
NG
AIT AT HIUCTO
5 M GH RSE
INUTVO AN R
ES LTAGD CA
BE E. REPA
FO CI
RE MOVTORS
SE E
RV PO
ICIN WER
G

Ground
• Must move the common mode jumper(s) to the disconnected position -

refer to "Move the Common Mode Jumper(s) to the Disconnected
• Should insulate terminal X4 on the Rectifier circuit board - refer to


• Must insulate terminal X4 on the Rectifier circuit board - refer to


Move the Common Mode Jumper(s) to the Disconnected Position

Follow the lettered steps below to move the common mode jumper(s) to the
disconnected position for each converter unit (refer to Figure 10.3 for
jumper location).:
Task Description
A Loosen the screws and two fasteners that secure the
jumper.
B Rotate the jumper to the lower position.
Tighten the screw and two fasteners.
C
Front View of Rectifying Circuit Board

Converter Unit
A C

circuit board for each converter unit (refer to Figure 10.3 for Rectifier board
location):
Task Description
connection.
Side View of Rectifying Circuit

Rectifying Structure Board
X41 X41
X1 X1
X4 X4
A Jumper B
Removing the Protective Removing the Lower Protective Screen

Covers from the Inverter
To access the power terminals, you must first remove the lower protective
Unit screen (on NEMA/UL Type 1 and Type 12 enclosures).
Task Description
A Remove the screws that secure the lower protective screen to the right side
enclosure only and remove the screen.
A

You must remove the protective covers to gain access to the Inverter units.
Task Description
DC
OP BUS !
AN ERAT COND DA
DW E
N
AIT AT HIUCTO GE
5 M GH RS
INUTVO AN R
ES LTAGD CA
BE E. REPA
FO CI
RE MOVTORS
SE E
RV PO
ICIN WER
G
DC
OP BUS !
AN ERAT COND DA
DW E
N
AIT AT HIUCTO GE
5 M GH RS
INUTVO AN R
ES LTAGD CA
BE E. REPA
FO CI
RE MOVTORS
SE E
RV PO
ICIN WER
G
DC
OP BUS !
AN ERAT COND DA
DW E
N
AIT AT HIUCTO GE
5 M GH RS
INUTVO AN R
ES LTAGD CA
BE E. REPA
FO CI
RE MOVTORS
SE E
RV PO
ICIN WER
G
A
Power Wiring Frame 13 400 and 600 Volt Class AC Input Power Wiring
Frame 13 size drives utilize two or three parallel power structures that are
pre-connected to line reactors through a fused input switch.
Figure 10.4 Frame 13 AC Wiring Example: Three Internal Fuses per Phase
L1 L2 L3
AC Input Power Wiring 400V, 1300 & 1450 Amp
Provided by Customer Example Shown
L1 L2 L3
Inside Drive
Converter 1 Converter 2 Converter 3
Inverter Unit
Motor Out
U V W
/T1 /T2 /T3
Output Power Wiring
Connect the motor to the output power terminals.
Figure 10.5 Frame 13 Motor Wiring Example
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 PE
Motor
Motor Frame
Covers from the Converter Unit" on page 10-6 and "Removing
the Protective Covers from the Inverter Unit" on page 10-10.)
Table 10.C Frame 13 Power Terminal Specifications

L1, L2, L3 (600 MCM) (14 AWG) (354 lb•in)
(600 MCM) (14 AWG) (354 lb•in)
(3)
➍ DC Bus DC input or external brake 300 mm2 2.1 mm2 40 N•m M12
(1)
(3)
These connections are bus bar type terminations and require the use of lug type connectors.
(4)
Figure 10.6 Frame 13 Drive Terminal Locations
➍
DC- DC- DC-
DC+ DC+ DC+
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
➊ Output Power
Terminals
➋
L1
L2
L3
Right enclosure shown only.

Chapter 11

installation.
Minimum Mounting
Clearances
200 mm
(8.0 in.) Min.
1500A Drive - 2400 mm Enclosure Shown.
800 mm
(31.50 in.) Min.
Operating Temperatures Frame 14 drives require a minimum of 4200 m3/h (2472 cfm) of cooling air
for each Inverter unit and 1150 m3/h (677 cfm) of cooling air for each
Converter unit.

700H 400/480V AC All 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° F) 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° F)
(540/650V DC)
600/690V AC 1500, 1900 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° F) 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° F)
(810/932V DC)
(810/932V DC)
700S 600/690V AC 1500 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° F) 0 to 40° C (32 to 104° F)
(810/932V DC)
Table 11.A Frame 14 Number of Inverter and Converter Units Per Drive
Voltage Class Amp Rating No. Converter Units No. Inverter Units
400/480V AC 1700, 2150 4 6
2700 6 6
600/690V AC 1500 3 6
1900, 2250 4 6
Dimensions Figure 11.1 Drives Above 1500 A, 2800 mm Enclosure Code A (NEMA/UL Type 1,
IP21) and M (NEMA/UL Type 1, IP21 w/Conformal Coat)
620
(24.5)
Lifting Points Lifting Points
603
(24)
44
(1.7)
Shipping Split
At This Location
CLOSE
OPEN
2276
(90)
2232
(88)
1400 (55) 1400 (55)
Access Holes for Motor Output Cables Access Holes for AC Input Cables (2 Places)
10.2
32.75 (1.3) 16 Places
535
(21.0)
32.25 (1.3) 535 (21.0) 735 (29.0) 735 (29.0) 535 (21.0)
65 (2.6) 65 (2.6) 65 (2.6)
2800 (110.2)
Figure 11.2 Drives Above 1500 A 2800 mm Enclosure Code H (NEMA/UL Type 12,
IP54) and W (NEMA/UL Type 12, IP54 w/Conformal Coat)
Assembly w/Filters 662
Lifting Points Lifting Points (26)
454
(18)
Shipping Split
At This Location
CLOSE
OPEN
2276
(90)
2232
(88)
NEMA/UL
Type 12
External
Door
Filters
1400 (55) 1400 (55)
10.2
16 Places 32.75 (1.3)
535
(21.0)
535 (21.0) 735 (29.0) 735 (29.0) 535 (21.0) 32.25 (1.3)
65 (2.6) 65 (2.6) 65 (2.6)
2800 (110.2)
Figure 11.3 1500 A Drives 2400 mm Enclosure Code A (NEMA/UL Type 1, IP 21) and M
(NEMA/UL Type 1, IP21 w/Conformal Coat)
620
(24.5)
Lifting Points Lifting Points
603
(24)
44
(1.7)
Shipping Split
At This Location
CLOSE
OPEN
2276
(90)
2232
(88)
797 (31.4) 797 (31.4) 797 (31.4)
10.2
12 Places 32.75 (1.3)
535
(21.0)
735 (29.0) 735 (29.0) 735 (29.0) 32.25 (1.3)

65 (2.6) 65 (2.6)
2397 (94.4)
Figure 11.4 1500 A Drives 2400 mm Enclosure Code H (NEMA/UL Type 12, IP54) and
W (NEMA/UL Type 12, IP54 w/Conformal Coat)
Assembly w/Filters
662
Lifting Points Lifting Points (26)
454
(18)
Shipping Split
At This Location
CLOSE
OPEN
2276
(90)
2232
(88)
NEMA/UL
Type 12
External
Door
Filters
797 (31.4) 797 (31.4) 797 (31.4)

2400 (94.4)
10.2 Access Holes for Motor Output Cables Access Holes for AC Input Cables (2 Places)
12 Places 32.75 (1.3)
535
(21.0)
735 (29.0) 735 (29.0) 735 (29.0) 32.25 (1.3)

32.25 (1.3) 65 (2.6) 65 (2.6)
Figure 11.5 DC Input Drive Enclosure Code A (NEMA/UL Type 1, IP 21) and M (NEMA/
UL Type 1, IP21 w/Conformal Coat)
620
(24.5)
601
(23.7)
44
(1.7)
2270
(89.4)
2232
(88)
1597
(63.0)
Wire entry for this enclosure is between two pieces of
soft foam. If the adjustable plate is slid back, a gap
develops between the foam pieces. Otherwise, the
62.25 675 125 (5.0) 675 foam acts as a loose gasket around the wires.
(2.5) (26.6) (26.6)

475 Overlapping metal bottom plate (slightly adjustable)
(18.7) Stationary metal back bottom plate
65
(2.6)
68.75 (2.7)
30 (1.2) 799.5 (31.5)
Figure 11.6 DC Input Drive Enclosure Code H (NEMA/UL Type 12, IP54) and W
(NEMA/UL Type 12, IP54 w/Conformal Coat)
662
Lifting Points (26)
454
(18)
CLOSE
OPEN
2276
(90)
2232
(88)
799.5 (31.5) 799.5 (31.5)

1597 (63.0)
Wire entry for this enclosure is between two pieces of
soft foam. If the adjustable plate is slid back, a gap
develops between the foam pieces. Otherwise, the
62.25 675 125 (5.0) 675 foam acts as a loose gasket around the wires.
(2.5) (26.6) (26.6)

475 Overlapping metal bottom plate (slightly adjustable)
(18.7)
Stationary metal back bottom plate
65
(2.6)
68.75 (2.7)
30 (1.2) 799.5 (31.5)
Lifting and Mounting Frame Enclosed Frame 14 Drives with DC Input

14 Drives
Enclosed Frame 14 drives with DC input are shipped with the control pan
mounted in the motor connection area of the left-hand enclosure. The
control pan must be moved from this location to a location in the adjacent
enclosure, away from the power connections.
Refer to Appendix B - Lifting and Mounting Instructions for detailed

instructions on lifting and mounting the drive. When you have completed
below.
To access and move the common mode jumper(s) and disconnect the
capacitor connections you must first move the Control frame and remove
the protective covers from the Converter unit. These steps are detailed on
the following pages.
installation.
Rectifier Rectifier
Drives Above 1500A 1500A Drives
board board
Common
Mode
Jumper
There is one jumper

for each Rectifying
Module. The
Rectifying Modules
and jumpers are
located on the left
side of the power
stack on the drive’s
converter units.
Converter Inverter Inverter Converter Converter Inverter Inverter

Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit

Removing the Protective Removing the Protective Screens

Covers from the Converter
Unit(s) To access the components within the Converter unit(s), you must first
remove the protective screens from the drive.
Task Description
A Remove the screws that secure the protective screens to the Converter unit(s)
and remove the screens.
1500A Drive Shown
A
Moving the Control Frame

To gain access to the airflow plate and protective covers on the left side
Converter unit of the drive you must move the Control Frame.
Task Description
B Swing the Control Frame out and away from the Converter unit.
B
Removing the Airflow Plate(s)

The drive is equipped with a plate(s), just above the Converter unit(s), that
directs airflow through the drive enclosure(s). You must remove this plate(s)
in order to access the protective covers.
Task Description
1500A Drive Shown
A

You must remove the protective covers to gain access to the Converter
unit(s).
Task Description
DC
OP BUS !
AN ERAT COND DA
DW E
N
AIT AT HIUCTO GE
5 M GH RS
INUTVO AN R
ES LTAGD CA
BE E. REPA
FO CI
RE MOVTORS
SE E
RV PO
ICIN WER
G
DC
OP BUS !
AN ERAT COND DA
DW E
N
AIT AT HIUCTO GE
5 M GH RS
INUTVO AN R
ES LTAGD CA
BE E. REPA
FO CI
RE MOVTORS
SE E
RV PO
ICIN WER
G
DC
OP BUS !
AN ERAT COND DA
DW E
NG
AIT AT HIUCTO
5 M GH RSE
INUTVO AN R
ES LTAGD CA
BE E. REPA
FO CI
RE MOVTORS
SE E
RV PO
ICIN WER
G

Ground
• Should insulate terminal X4 on the Rectifier circuit board - refer to




Move the Common Mode Jumper(s) to the Disconnected Position

Follow the lettered steps below to move the common mode jumper(s) to the
disconnected position for each converter unit (refer to Figure 11.7 for MOV
jumper location).:
Task Description
A Loosen the screws and two fasteners that secure the jumper.
B Rotate the jumper to the lower position.

Tighten the screw and two fasteners.
C
Front View of Rectifying Circuit Board

Converter Unit
A C

circuit board for each converter unit (refer to Figure 11.7 for Rectifier board
location):
Task Description
connection.
Side View of Rectifying Circuit

Rectifying Structure Board
X41 X41
X1 X1
X4 X4
A Jumper B
Power Wiring To access the power terminals, you must first remove the protective screens
(on NEMA/UL Type 1 and Type 12 enclosures), air flow plate and
protective covers from the Inverter units. These steps are detailed below.
Removing the Protective Removing the Protective Screens

Covers from the Inverter
To access the components within the Power Structures, you must first
Units remove the protective screens from the Inverter units.
Task Description
A Remove the screws that secure the protective screens to the inverter units and
remove the screens.
A
Removing the Airflow Plates

The drive is equipped with plates, just above the top of the protective
covers, that direct airflow through the drive enclosure. You must remove
these plates in order to access the protective covers.
Task Description
A Remove the T8 Torx-head screws that secure the airflow plates to the drive.
B Slide the airflow plates off of the drive.
A

You must remove the protective covers from the Inverter units in order to
gain access to the power terminals.
Task Description
A Remove the four M5 POZIDRIV screws that secure each of the three main and bottom
protective covers to the drive, then remove the protective covers.
DC
OP BUS !
AN ERAT COND DA
DW E
N
AIT AT HIUCTO GE
5 M GH RS
INUTVO AN R
ES LTAGD CA
BE E. REPA
FO CI
RE MOVTORS
SE E
RV PO
ICIN WER
G
DC
OP BUS !
AN ERAT COND DA
DW E
NG
AIT AT HIUCTO
5 M GH RSE
INUTVO AN R
ES LTAGD CA
BE E. REPA
FO CI
RE MOVTORS
SE E
RV PO
ICIN WER
G
DC
OP BUS !
AN ERAT COND DA
DW E
N
AIT AT HIUCTO GE
5 M GH RS
INUTVO AN R
ES LTAGD CA
BE E. REPA
FO CI
RE MOVTORS
SE E
RV PO
ICIN WER
G
400 and 690 Volt Class AC Input Wiring for Frame 14 Drives
Frame 14 size drives utilize three parallel converter units or two pairs of two
parallel converter units that are pre-connected to line reactors and are fed
through motor operated circuit breakers.
Frame 14 drives can be ordered with or without du/dt filters. The du/dt filter
limits the rate of change of output voltage and the rate of change in the
IGBT or output transistor switching event.
Refer to the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated
(PWM) AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001…, for minimum
inductance on installations where du/dt filters are not installed.
Figure 11.8 1500A Drive AC Wiring Example:

AC Input Power Wiring Provided by Customer
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 AC Input Power
Terminals Inside Drive
M M M
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Converter 1 Converter 2 Converter 3
B- B+ B- B+ B- B+
6x 6x
B- B+ B- B+
Inverter 1 Inverter 2
U V W U V W
/T1 /T2 /T3 /T1 /T2 /T3
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
du/dt Filter du/dt Filter
Motor Output Motor Output
U V W U V W
/T1 /T2 /T3 /T1 /T2 /T3
Figure 11.9 Drives Above 1500A AC Wiring Example:

AC Input Power Wiring Provided by Customer
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 AC Input Power L1 L2 L3
Terminals Inside Drive
M M M M
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Converter 1 Converter 2 Converter 3 Converter 4
B- B+ B- B+ B- B+ B- B+
6x 6x
B- B+ B- B+
Inverter 1 Inverter 2
U V W U V W
/T1 /T2 /T3 /T1 /T2 /T3
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
du/dt Filter du/dt Filter
Motor Output Motor Output
U V W U V W
/T1 /T2 /T3 /T1 /T2 /T3
Output Power Wiring for Frame 14 Drives
two sets of output power terminals. You must connect the motor to both sets
of output power terminals.
Important: The minimum cable length for parallel motor cables from the
drive to the point where the cables connect is 5m (16.4 ft.). Join
the parallel cables at the motor end (not the drive end). Or,
install a reactor on the output of each power module with a
minimum of 5 µH prior to joining the parallel cables at the
motor end.
Figure 11.8 Motor Wiring Example
INU1 INU2
1U/T1 1V/T2 1W/T3 PE 2U/T1 2V/T2 2W/T3 PE
1L1 1L2 1L3 2L1 2L2 2L3

du/dt Filter 1 du/dt Filter 2
1U/T1 1V/T2 1W/T3 PE 2U/T1 2V/T2 2W/T3 PE
5m
minimum
Motor
Motor Frame
Covers from the Converter Unit(s)" on page 11-10 and
"Removing the Protective Covers from the Inverter Units" on
page 11-16.)
Table 11.B Power Terminal Specifications
L1, L2, L3 (600 MCM) (14 AWG) (354 lb•in)
(600 MCM) (14 AWG) (354 lb•in)
(1)
(4)
Figure 11.10 1500A Drive Terminal Locations

DC Bus Terminals
DC–
➍ (Front Terminals)
Output Power Terminals

Center Enclosure Shown
➋ without du/dt Filters
DC+
(Back Terminals)
Input Power
➊ Terminals U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
L1
L2
Side View
L3
➌ Ground Terminals
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3

➋ with du/dt Filters
Figure 11.11 Drives Above 1500A Terminal Locations

➍ DC Bus Terminals
DC– (In Both Enclosures)
(Front Terminals)
Output Power Terminals U/T1 V/T2 W/T3

➋ without du/dt Filters
(in two center enclosures)
Side View
DC+
(Back Terminals)
Input Power Input Power
➊ Terminals ➊ Terminals
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
➌ Ground Terminals
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3

Center Enclosures Shown

➋ with du/dt Filters
(in two center enclosures)
Frame 14 Circuit Breakers Frame 14 drives utilize molded case circuit breakers (MCCBs) to provide
overload/overcurrent and undervoltage protection on the incoming AC lines
and to synchronize the energizing of the power structures. The circuit
breakers are located inside of the enclosures in front of the AC Chokes.
Drives Above 1500A 1500A Drives
Push On Push Off Push On Push Off
DISCHARGED DISCHARGED
SPRING
OFF SPRING
OFF
S S
L L
I I
N N
Rectifying Power Power Rectifying Rectifying Power Power

Structure Structure Structure Structure Structure Structure Structure
Note: Control Frame not shown for clarity only.

Circuit Breaker DIP Switch Settings

The DIP switches on the circuit breakers are configured to the correct
settings at the factory. However, the settings detailed in Table 11.C below
should be verified before charging the circuit breaker motor operators and
operating the drive.
Table 11.C Circuit Breaker DIP Switch Settings

Drive ND Cont. L S/I N
Voltage Class Amp Rating I1 t1 S/I I3 t2 ON/OFF 50% / 100%
400/480V AC 1770 0.76 3s S 1.5 0.1 s OFF na
2150 0.92 3s S 1.5 0.1 s OFF na
600/690V AC 1500 0.88 3s S 1.0 0.1 s OFF na
1900 0.84 3s S 1.0 0.1 s OFF na
2250 0.96 3s S 1.5 0.1 s OFF na
Figure 11.12 Circuit Breaker DIP Switches Location
I1 = I2=
In x (0.4+
S In x
I3=
L t1 t2
I
DISCHARGED
N
SPRING
OFF
S
L
I
N
Charging the MCCB Motor Operators

The stored energy motor operators must be charged prior to the first time the
circuit breakers are closed and whenever input power is removed and
re-applied to the drive.
ATTENTION: When an external device for circuit breaker

! motor operator status is not used, the enclosure door(s) must be
open in order to view the status indicator on the circuit breakers.
Only qualified personnel familiar with PowerFlex 700S and
700H drives and associated machinery should plan or implement
the installation, start-up and subsequent maintenance of the
system. Failure to comply may result in personal injury and/or
equipment damage.
1. With the doors of the enclosures containing the MCCBs open, apply
control voltage to the drive.
2. Press and hold the “Open” (red) control button on the enclosure door
until the status text “Charged Spring” displays on each of the MCCBs
(see illustration below).
Close and Open buttons

location on enclosure door.
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
Status Text displays “Charged Spring”

when charged.
CHARGED
SPRING
Push On Push Off
DISCHARGED
SPRING
OFF
S
L
I
N
3. The MCCBs can now be closed (see "Closing the Circuit Breakers and
Energizing the Drive" on page 11-27).
Closing the Circuit Breakers and Energizing the Drive

1. Close and latch all enclosure doors.
2. Press the “Close” (green) control button on the enclosure door.
3. The circuit breakers can be opened by pressing the “Open” (red) control
button on the enclosure door.
The motor operators are automatically recharged when they are opened.
Resetting the Circuit Breakers

The electronic trip unit will open the circuit breaker in the case of a drive
overload/overcurrent condition. When a voltage drop (U < 0.7 x Un) or loss
of the main supply occurs, the undervoltage release coil of the circuit
breakers will open. The trip indicator contacts of the circuit breakers are
connected in series. Therefore, if one circuit breakers trips due to an
undervoltage or overload/overcurrent condition, all circuit breakers will
open/trip.
If the circuit breakers have opened due to an overcurrent fault, the condition
that caused the fault must be corrected and the fault cleared before the
circuit breakers can be reset and the drive started. In this case, refer to
"Charging the MCCB Motor Operators" on page 11-26.
Appendix A
Specifications
Category PowerFlex 700H PowerFlex 700S

Agency Listed to UL508C and CAN/CSA-C2.2 No. 14-M91. UL and cUL Listed to UL508C and CAN/CSA - 22.2 No. 14-95.
Certification
Marked for all applicable European Directives (1) Marked for all applicable European Directives
EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) EMC Directive (89/336/EEC)
EN 61800-3 Adjustable Speed electrical power drive systems Emissions:
Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) EN 61800-3 Adjustable Speed electrical power drive systems Part 3
EN 50178 Electronic Equipment for use in Power Installations Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC)
EN 50178 Electronic Equipment for use in Power Installations
Certified to AS/NZS, 1997 Group 1, Class A. Certified to AS/NZS, 1997 Group 1, Class A.
N223
Certified to ATEX directive 94/9/EC. Group II Category (2) GD Certified to ATEX directive 94/9/EC. Group II Category (2) GD Applications
Applications with ATEX Approved Motors. Refer to Appendix E - with ATEX Approved Motors. PowerFlex 700S Phase II Control drives only.
II 2 G/D Instructions for ATEX Approved PowerFlex 700H Drives in Group II Refer to publication 20D-UM006… for more information.
Category (2) Applications with ATEX Approved Motors for more
information.
NA TUV functional safety report only (no FS mark on the label)
..
W
TUV
Rheinland
Product Safety
E
Production inspected
C
EN 50178
Bauart geprüft
Functional
..
TUV Safety
Rheinland Type approved
The drive is also designed to meet the following specifications: The drive is designed to meet applicable requirements of the following
NFPA 70 - US National Electrical Code codes/standards:
NEMA ICS 7.1 - Safety standards for Construction and Guide for IEC 61800-2 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - General
Selection, Installation and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive requirements
Systems. IEC 61800-5-1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Safety
IEC 146 - International Electrical Code. requirements
NFPA 70 - US National Electrical Code
(1)
Applied noise impulses may be counted in addition to the standard pulse train causing erroneously high [Pulse Freq] readings.
Category Specification PowerFlex 700H PowerFlex 700S

Protection Drive 380/400V 480V 500V 600V 690V 380/400V 480V 500V 600V 690V
AC Input Overvoltage Trip: 611Vac 611Vac 611Vac 806Vac 806Vac 675Vac 675Vac 675Vac 889Vac 889Vac
AC Input Undervoltage Trip: 235Vac 235Vac 235Vac 326Vac 326Vac Adjustable
Bus Overvoltage Trip: 911Vdc 911Vdc 911V dc 1200V dc 1200V dc 911Vdc 911Vdc 911Vdc 1200Vdc 1200Vdc
Bus Undervoltage Shutoff/Fault: 333Vdc 333Vdc 333Vdc 461Vdc 461Vdc Adjustable
Nominal Bus Voltage (Full Load): 517Vdc 621Vdc 645Vdc 776Vdc 890Vdc 540Vdc 648Vdc 645Vdc 810Vdc 931V dc
Heat Sink Thermistor: Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip
Drive Overcurrent Trip
Software Overcurrent Trip: — Calculated value, 105% of motor rated to 200% of drive rated
Hardware Overcurrent Trip: 360% of rated Heavy Duty current (typical) 360% of rated Heavy Duty current (typical)
Instantaneous Current Limit: — —
Line transients: up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62.41-1991 Up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62.41-1991
Control Logic Noise Immunity: Showering arc transients up to 1500V peak Showering arc transients up to 1500V peak
Power Ride-Thru: 15 milliseconds at full load 15 milliseconds at full load
Logic Control Ride-Thru: 0.5 seconds minimum, 2 seconds typical 0.25 seconds, drive not running
Ground Fault Trip: Phase-to-ground on drive output Phase-to-ground on drive output
Short Circuit Trip: Phase-to-phase on drive output Phase-to-phase on drive output
A-2 Specifications

Environment Altitude: 1000 m (3300 ft.) maximum without derating. Derate the drive 1000 m (3300 ft.) maximum without derating. Derate the drive
by 1% for every 100 m (328 ft.) above 1000 m (3300 ft.). by 1% for every 100 m (328 ft.) above 1000 m (3300 ft.).
Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature Based on drive rating, refer to Drive Frame chapters Based on drive rating, refer to Drive Frame chapters.
without De-rating:
Storage Temperature (all const.): –40 to 60° C (–40 to 140° F) –40 to 70° C (–40 to 158° F)
Atmosphere: Important: Drive must not be installed in an area where the Important: Drive must not be installed in an area where the
ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas, vapors ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas, vapors
or dust. If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of or dust. If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of
time, it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to time, it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to
a corrosive atmosphere. a corrosive atmosphere.
Relative Humidity: 5 to 95% non-condensing 5 to 95% non-condensing
Shock:
Non-operational 15G peak for 11ms duration (±1.0 ms) 15G peak for 11ms duration (±1.0 ms)
Vibration: 2 mm (0.0787 in.) displacement, 1G peak 2 mm (0.0787 in.) displacement, 1G peak
EN50178 / EN60068-2-6 EN50178 / EN60068-2-6
Sound: Frame Sound Back- Note: Sound pressure Frame Sound Back- Note: Sound pressure
Level ground level is measured at 1 Level ground level is measured at 1
Noise meter. All devices Noise meter. All devices
Level measured are 400V Level measured are 400V
9 78 dba 49 dba IP21 and in power up 9 78 dba 49 dba IP21 and in power up
mode. mode.
10 77 dba 49 dba 10 77 dba 49 dba
13 76d ba 46 dba 13 76d ba 46 dba
Electrical AC Input Voltage Tolerance: ±10% ±10%
Frequency Tolerance: 47-63 Hz. 47-63 Hz.
Input Phases: Three-phase input provides full rating for all drives. Three-phase input provides full rating for all drives.
Single-phase operation provides 50% of rated current. Single-phase operation provides 50% of rated current.
Displacement Power Factor: 0.98 across entire speed range. 0.98 across entire speed range.
Efficiency: 97.5% at rated amps, nominal line volts. 97.5% at rated amps, nominal line volts.
Maximum Short Circuit Rating: ≤200,000 Amps symmetrical. ≤ 200,000 Amps symmetrical.
Actual Short Circuit Rating: Determined by AIC rating of installed fuse/circuit breaker. Determined by AIC rating of installed fuse/circuit breaker.
Maximum Drive to Motor Power Ratio: Recommended not greater than 2:1 ratio. Drive to motor rating cannot exceed a 2:1 ratio.
Specifications A-3

Control Method: Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency. Ratings Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency, Indirect
apply to all drives (refer to the Derating Guidelines in the Self-Organized, Field-Oriented Control, Current-regulated.
PowerFlex Reference Manual). The drive can be supplied as 6 Ratings apply to all drives (refer to the Derating Guidelines in
pulse or 12 pulse in a configured package. the PowerFlex 700S Phase II Reference Manual, publication
PFLEX-RM003...). The drive can be supplied as 6 pulse or 12
pulse in a configured package.
Carrier Frequency: 1-6 kHz. 2 kHz
Settings: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 kHz
(6 kHz is for V/Hz operation only)
Output Voltage Range: 0 to rated motor voltage 0 to rated motor voltage
Output Frequency Range: 0 to 320 Hz 0 to 400 Hz
Note: For output frequencies above 320 - 400 Hz consult the
factory.
Frequency Accuracy –
Digital Input: Within ±0.01% of set output frequency.
Analog Input: Within ±0.4% of maximum output frequency.
Frequency Control: Speed regulation - with Slip Compensation –
0.5% of base speed across 40:1 speed range
40:1 operating range
Speed Control: Speed regulation - without feedback
50 rad/sec bandwidth
Speed regulation - with feedback
300 rad/sec bandwidth
Torque Regulation: Torque Regulation - without feedback
±10%, 600 rad/sec bandwidth
Torque Regulation - with feedback
±5%, 2500 rad/sec bandwidth
Selectable Motor Control: Sensorless Vector with full tuning. Standard V/Hz with full Field Oriented Control with and without a feedback device and
custom capability. permanent magnet motor control
Stop Modes: Multiple programmable stop modes including - Ramp, Coast, Multiple programmable stop modes including - Ramp, Coast
DC-Brake, Ramp-to-Hold and S-curve. and Current Limit.
Accel/Decel: Two independently programmable accel and decel times. Each Two independently programmable accel and decel times. Each
time may be programmed from 0 to 3276.7 seconds in 0.1 time may be programmed from 0 - 6553.5 seconds in 0.1
second increments. second increments.
S-Curve Time: 0-100% of accel/decel time. Adjustable from 0.5 to 4.0 seconds.
Intermittent Overload: 110% Overload capability for up to 1 minute 110% Overload capability for up to 1 minute
150% Overload capability for up to 2 seconds 150% Overload capability for up to 3 seconds
Current Limit Capability: Proactive Current Limit programmable from 20 to 160% of rated Independent Motoring and Regenerating Power Limits
output current. Programmable proportional gain. programmable to 800% of rated output current
Electronic Motor Overload Protection: Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response. Investigated Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response. Investigated
by U.L. to comply with N.E.C. Article 430. U.L. File E59272, by U.L. to comply with N.E.C. Article 430. U.L. File E59272,
volume 12. volume 12.
A-4 Specifications

Feedback Encoder Inputs (2): Dual Channel Plus Marker, Isolated with differential transmitter
Output (Line Drive) Incremental, Dual Channel Quadrature type
Encoder Voltage Supply: 5V DC or 12 V DC 320 mA/channel
5V DC minimum high state voltage of 3.0V DC, maximum low
state voltage at 0.4V DC
12 V DC minimum high state voltage of 7.0V DC, maximum low
state voltage of 0.4V DC
Encoder PPR Rating: Encoder PPR ratings are limited to the values specified in the
table below:
mod112
n = 2n = x mod 75 mod 125 mod 225 mod 375 mod 625 5
0 1 75 125 225 375 625 1125
1 2 150 250 450 750 1250 2250
2 4 300 500 900 1500 2500 4500
3 8 600 1000 1800 3000 5000 9000
4 16 1200 2000 3600 6000 10000 18000
5 32 2400 4000 7200 12000 20000 --
6 64 -- -- -- -- -- --
7 128 -- -- -- -- -- --
8 256 -- -- -- -- -- --
9 512 -- -- -- -- -- --
10 1024 -- -- -- -- -- --
11 2048 -- -- -- -- -- --
12 4096 -- -- -- -- -- --
13 8192 -- -- -- -- -- --
14 16384 -- -- -- -- -- --
Maximum Required Input Frequency: 400 kHz

Hi-Resolution Stegmann Option: Refer to specifications on page C-1
Encoder Voltage Supply: 11.5V dc @ 130 mA
Hi-Resolution Feedback: Sine/Cosine 1V P-P Offset 2.5
Maximum Cable Length: 182 m (600 ft.)
RS-485 Interface: Hi-Resolution Feedback Option card obtains the following
information via the Hiperface RS-485 interface shortly after
power-up: Address, Command Number, Mode, Number of turns,
Number of Sine/Cos cycles, Checksum
Customer-I/O Plug (P1) - Hi Res: Allen-Bradley PN: S94262912
Weidmuller PN: BL3.50/90/12BK
Resolver Option:
Excitation Frequency: 2400 Hz
Excitation Voltage: 4.25-26 Vrms
Operating Frequency Range: 1 - 10 kHz
Feedback Voltage: 2V ± 300 mV
Maximum Cable Length: 304.8 meters (1000 ft.)
DriveLogix User Available MemoryBase: 256 kbytes
With Memory Expansion Board: 768 kbytes
Battery: 1756-BA1 (Allen-Bradley PN 94194801) 0.59g lithium
Serial Cable: 1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC
1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC
1756-CP3 directly to controller
1747-CP3 directly to controller
category 3 (2)
Flex I/O Connection: Up to (8) modules
FLEXBUS Current Output: 640 mA maximum @ 5.1V dc
Cable: 4100-CCF3
Drive Ratings and Protection Devices Catalog Number Designations

The first three characters of the drive catalog numbers in the tables on the
following pages designate the type of drive control. The information in the
tables are valid for PowerFlex drives with both the 700H and 700S control.
Therefore, the third character of the drive catalog number in each table is
replaced with an “x”. For ordering purposes, drives with the 700H control
are designated as “20C” and drives with the 700S control are designated as
“20D”.
Specifications A-5
Drive Ratings The tables on the following pages provide drive ratings (including
continuous, 1 minute and 3 seconds), PWM frequency ratings, ambient
operating temperatures and watts loss information.
Table A.A 400 Volt AC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Ratings

PWM Input Watts
Frame
Drive Catalog kW Rating Freq. Temp. Ratings Output Amps Loss
Number ND HD kHz °C Amps Cont. 1 Min. 3 Sec. Watts
20xC261 9 132 - 2 40 263 261 287 410 2700
- 110 2 40 207 205 308 410 2700
20xC300 9 160 - 2 40 302 300 330 450 3100
- 132 2 40 247 245 368 490 3100
20xC385 10 200 - 2 40 388 385 424 600 4320
- 160 2 40 302 300 450 600 4320
20xC460 10 250 - 2 40 463 460 506 770 5335
- 200 2 40 388 385 578 770 5335
20xC500 10 250 - 2 40 504 500 550 750 5921
- 250 2 40 423 420 630 840 5921
20xC590 11 315 - 2 40 594 590 649 956 6620
- 250 2 40 524 520 780 956 6620
20xC650 11 355 - 2 40 655 650 715 1062 7538
- 315 2 40 594 590 885 1062 7538
20xC730 11 400 - 2 40 735 730 803 1095 8312
- 355 2 40 655 650 975 1170 8312
20xC820 12 450 - 2 40 826 820 902 1230 9201
- 400 2 40 735 730 1095 1314 9201
20xC920 12 500 - 2 40 927 920 1012 1380 10670
- 450 2 40 826 820 1230 1476 10670
20xC1K0 12 560 - 2 40 1038 1030 1133 1555 11729
- 500 2 35 927 920 1370 1600 11729
20xC1K1 13 630 - 2 40 1158 1150 1265 1620 13801
- 560 2 40 1038 1030 1545 1620 13801
20xC1K3 13 710 - 2 40 1310 1300 1430 2079 15077
- 630 2 40 1158 1150 1725 2079 15077
20xC1K4 13 800 - 2 40 1461 1450 1595 2175 16511
- 710 2 40 1209 1200 1800 2400 16511
20xC1K7(1) 14 1000 - 2 40 1783 1770 1947 2655 24800
- 900 2 40 1612 1600 2400 2880 24800
20xC2K1(1) 14 1200 - 2 40 2166 2150 2365 3225 29900
- 1100 2 40 1954 1940 2910 3492 29900
20xC2K7(1) 14 1600 - 2 40 2720 2700 2970 3933 39680
- 1300 2 40 2317 2300 3287 3933 39680
(1) Not available with 700S Control.
A-6 Specifications
Table A.B 480 Volt AC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Ratings

Drive PWM Input Watts
Frame
Catalog HP Rating Freq. Temp. Ratings Output Amps Loss
20xD261 9 200 - 2 40 252 261 287 410 2700
- 150 2 40 207 205 308 410 2700
20xD300 9 250 - 2 40 290 300 330 450 3100
- 200 2 40 247 245 368 490 3100
20xD385 10 300 - 2 40 372 385 424 600 4320
- 250 2 40 302 300 450 600 4320
20xD460 10 350 - 2 40 444 460 506 770 5335
- 300 2 40 388 385 578 770 5335
20xD500 10 450 - 2 40 483 500 550 750 5921
- 350 2 40 423 420 630 840 5921
20xD590 11 500 - 2 40 570 590 649 956 6620
- 450 2 40 524 520 780 956 6620
20xD650 11 500 - 2 40 628 650 715 1062 7538
- 500 2 40 594 590 885 1062 7538
20xD730 11 600 - 2 40 705 730 803 1095 8312
- 500 2 40 655 650 975 1170 8312
20xD820 12 700 - 2 40 792 820 902 1230 9201
- 600 2 40 735 730 1095 1314 9201
20xD920 12 800 - 2 40 888 920 1012 1380 10670
- 700 2 40 826 820 1230 1476 10670
20xD1K0 12 900 - 2 40 994 1030 1133 1555 11729
- 800 2 35 927 920 1370 1600 11729
20xD1K1 13 1000 - 2 40 1110 1150 1265 1620 13801
- 900 2 40 994 1030 1545 1620 13801
20xD1K3 13 1200 - 2 40 1255 1300 1430 2079 15077
- 1000 2 40 1110 1150 1725 2079 15077
20xD1K4 13 1250 - 2 40 1400 1450 1595 2175 16511
- 1000 2 40 1158 1200 1800 2400 16511
20xD1K7(1) 14 1500 - 2 40 1709 1770 1947 2655 24800
- 1400 2 40 1545 1600 2400 2880 24800
20xD2K1(1) 14 1900 - 2 40 2076 2150 2365 3225 29900
- 1700 2 40 1873 1940 2910 3492 29900
20xD2K7(1) 14 2300 - 2 40 2607 2700 2970 3933 39680
- 2000 2 40 2220 2300 3287 3933 39680
(1)
Not available with 700S Control.
Specifications A-7
Table A.C 600 Volt AC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Ratings

Frame
Catalog HP Rating Freq. Temp. Ratings Output Amps Loss
20xE170 9 150 – (3) 40 164 170 187 245 –
– 150 (3) 40 139 144 216 245 –
(3)
20xE208 9 200 – 35 201 208 230 289 –
(3)
– 150 40 164 170 250 289 –
20xE261 10 250 – (3) 40 252 261 287 375 4206
– 200 (3) 40 201 208 312 375 4206
(3)
20xE325 10 350 – 40 314 325 358 470 4751
(3)
– 250 40 252 261 392 470 4751
20xE385 10 400 – (3) 40 372 385 424 585 5527
– 350 (3) 40 314 325 488 585 5527
(3)
20xE416 10 450 – 35 402 416 458 585 5622
(3)
– 350 40 314 325 488 585 5622
(3)
20xE460 11 500 – 40 444 460 506 693 6345
(3)
– 400 40 372 385 578 693 6345
(3)
20xE502 11 500 – 40 485 502 552 828 6925
(3)
– 500 40 444 460 690 828 6925
(3)
20xE590 11 600 – 35 570 590 649 885 7539
(3)
– 500 35 485 502 753 904 7539
(3)
20xE650 12 700 – 40 628 650 715 1062 9502
(3)
– 650 40 570 590 885 1062 9502
(3)
20xE750 12 800 – 40 724 750 825 1170 10570
(3)
– 700 40 628 650 975 1170 10570
20xE820(1) 12 900 – (3)
35 792 820 902 1170 11082
(3)
– 700 35 628 650 975 1170 11082
(3)
20xE920 13 1000 – 40 888 920 1012 1380 12690
(3)
– 900 40 792 820 1230 1410 12690
(3)
20xE1K0 13 1100 – 40 994 1030 1133 1545 15907
(3)
– 1000 40 888 920 1380 1755 15907
(3)
20xE1K1 13 1300 – 35 1139 1180 1298 1755 17306
(3)
– 1100 35 994 1030 1463 1755 17306
(3)
20xE1K5 14 1600 – 40 1448 1500 1650 2250 22500
(3)
– 1400 40 1255 1300 1950 2340 22500
(2) (3)
20xE1K9 14 2000 – 40 1834 1900 2090 2700 28500
(3)
– 1600 40 1448 1500 2250 2700 28500
20xE2K2(2) 14 2400 – (3)
30 2172 2250 2475 3335 33400
(3)
– 2000 30 1834 1900 2782 3335 33400
(1) 20DE820 drives (ND) are only capable of producing 95% of starting torque under 10 Hz.
(2)
(3)
Rated PWM for 700H control 1.5kHz, Rated PWM for 700S control 2.0kHz.
A-8 Specifications
Table A.D 690 Volt AC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Ratings

Frame
Catalog kW Rating Freq. Temp. Ratings Output Amps Loss
20xF170 9 160 – 2 40 171 170 187 245 –
– 132 2 40 145 144 216 245 –
20xF208 9 200 – 2 35 210 208 230 289 –
– 160 2 40 171 170 250 289 –
20xF261 10 250 – 2 40 263 261 287 375 4206
– 200 2 40 210 208 312 375 4206
20xF325 10 315 – 2 40 327 325 358 470 4751
– 250 2 40 263 261 392 470 4751
20xF385 10 355 – 2 40 388 385 424 585 5527
– 315 2 40 327 325 488 585 5527
20xF416 10 400 – 2 35 419 416 458 585 5622
– 315 2 40 327 325 488 585 5622
20xF460 11 450 – 2 40 463 460 506 693 6345
– 355 2 40 388 385 578 693 6345
20xF502 11 500 – 2 40 506 502 552 828 6925
– 400 2 40 463 460 690 828 6925
20xF590 11 560 – 2 35 594 590 649 885 7539
– 500 2 35 506 502 753 904 7539
20xF650 12 630 – 2 40 655 650 715 1062 9502
– 560 2 40 594 590 885 1062 9502
20xF750 12 710 – 2 40 756 750 825 1170 10570
– 630 2 40 655 650 975 1170 10570
20xF820(1) 12 800 – 2 35 826 820 902 1170 11082
– 630 2 35 655 650 975 1170 11082
20xF920 13 900 – 2 40 927 920 1012 1380 12690
– 800 2 40 826 820 1230 1410 12690
20xF1K0 13 1000 – 2 40 1038 1030 1133 1545 15907
– 900 2 40 927 920 1380 1755 15907
20xF1K1 13 1100 – 2 35 1189 1180 1298 1755 17306
– 1000 2 35 1038 1030 1463 1755 17306
20xF1K5 14 1500 – 2 40 1511 1500 1650 2250 22500
– 1300 2 40 1310 1300 1950 2340 22500
20xF1K9(2) 14 1800 – 2 40 1914 1900 2090 2700 28500
– 1500 2 40 1511 1500 2250 2700 28500
20xF2K2(2) 14 2000 – 2 30 2267 2250 2475 3335 33400
– 1800 2 30 1914 1900 2782 3335 33400
(1) 20DF820 drives (ND) are only capable of producing 95% of starting torque under 10 Hz.
(2)
Specifications A-9
Table A.E 540 Volt DC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Ratings

Drive kW Rating PWM Freq. Temp. DC Input Ratings Output Amps
Frame
Catalog
Number ND HD kHz °C Amps Cont. 1 Min. 3 Sec.
20xH261 9 132 - 2 40 307 261 287 410
- 110 2 40 241 205 308 410
20xH300 9 160 - 2 40 353 300 330 450
- 132 2 40 288 245 368 490
20xH385 10 200 - 2 40 453 385 424 600
- 160 2 40 353 300 450 600
20xH460 10 250 - 2 40 541 460 506 770
- 200 2 40 453 385 578 770
20xH500 10 250 - 2 40 589 500 550 750
- 250 2 40 494 420 630 840
20xH590 11 315 - 2 40 695 590 649 956
- 250 2 40 612 520 780 956
20xH650 11 355 - 2 40 765 650 715 1062
- 315 2 40 695 590 885 1062
20xH730 11 400 - 2 40 859 730 803 1095
- 355 2 40 765 650 975 1170
20xH820 12 450 - 2 40 965 820 902 1230
- 400 2 40 859 730 1095 1314
20xH920 12 500 - 2 40 1083 920 1012 1380
- 450 2 40 965 820 1230 1476
20xH1K0 12 560 - 2 40 1213 1030 1133 1555
- 500 2 35 1083 920 1370 1600
20xH1K1 13 630 - 2 40 1354 1150 1265 1620
- 560 2 40 1213 1030 1545 1620
20xH1K3 13 710 - 2 40 1530 1300 1430 2079
- 630 2 40 1354 1150 1725 2079
20xH1K4 13 800 - 2 40 1707 1450 1595 2175
- 710 2 40 1413 1200 1800 2400
20xH1K7(1) 14 1000 - 2 40 2084 1770 1947 2655
- 900 2 40 1883 1600 2400 2880
20xH2K1(1) 14 1200 - 2 40 2531 2150 2365 3225
- 1100 2 40 2284 1940 2910 3492
20xH2K7(1) 14 1600 - 2 40 3178 2700 2970 3933
- 1300 2 40 2708 2300 3287 3933
(1)
A-10 Specifications
Table A.F 650 Volt DC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Ratings

HP Rating PWM Freq. Temp. DC Input Ratings Output Amps
Frame
Drive Catalog
20xJ261 9 200 - 2 40 294 261 287 410
- 150 2 40 231 205 308 410
20xJ300 9 250 - 2 40 338 300 330 450
- 200 2 40 294 245 368 490
20xJ385 10 300 - 2 40 434 385 424 600
- 250 2 40 338 300 450 600
20xJ460 10 350 - 2 40 519 460 506 770
- 300 2 40 434 385 578 770
20xJ500 10 450 - 2 40 564 500 550 750
- 350 2 40 474 420 630 840
20xJ590 11 500 - 2 40 666 590 649 956
- 450 2 40 587 520 780 956
20xJ650 11 500 - 2 40 733 650 715 1062
- 500 2 40 666 590 885 1062
20xJ730 11 600 - 2 40 824 730 803 1095
- 500 2 40 733 650 975 1170
20xJ820 12 700 - 2 40 925 820 902 1230
- 600 2 40 824 730 1095 1314
20xJ920 12 800 - 2 40 1038 920 1012 1380
- 700 2 40 925 820 1230 1476
20xJ1K0 12 900 - 2 40 1162 1030 1133 1555
- 800 2 35 1038 920 1370 1600
20xJ1K1 13 1000 - 2 40 1297 1150 1265 1620
- 900 2 40 1162 1030 1545 1620
20xJ1K3 13 1200 - 2 40 1467 1300 1430 2079
- 1000 2 40 1297 1150 1725 2079
20xJ1K4 13 1250 - 2 40 1636 1450 1595 2175
- 1000 2 40 1354 1200 1800 2400
20xJ1K7(1) 14 1500 - 2 40 1997 1770 1947 2655
- 1400 2 40 1805 1600 2400 2880
20xJ2K1(1) 14 1900 - 2 40 2425 2150 2365 3225
- 1700 2 40 2189 1940 2910 3492
20xJ2K7(1) 14 2300 - 2 40 3046 2700 2970 3933
- 2000 2 40 2595 2300 3287 3933
(1)
Specifications A-11
Table A.G 810 Volt DC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Ratings

HP Rating PWM Freq. Temp. DC Input Ratings Output Amps
Frame
Drive Catalog
20xK170 9 150 – 2 40 192 170 187 245
– 150 2 40 162 144 216 245
20xK208 9 200 – 2 35 235 208 230 289
– 150 2 40 192 170 250 289
20xK261 10 250 – 2 40 294 261 287 375
– 200 2 40 235 208 312 375
20xK325 10 350 – 2 40 367 325 358 470
– 250 2 40 294 261 392 470
20xK385 10 400 – 2 40 434 385 424 585
– 350 2 40 367 325 488 585
20xK416 10 450 – 2 35 469 416 458 585
– 350 2 40 367 325 488 585
20xK460 11 500 – 2 40 519 460 506 693
– 400 2 40 434 385 578 693
20xK502 11 500 – 2 40 566 502 552 828
– 500 2 40 519 460 690 828
20xK590 11 600 – 2 35 666 590 649 885
– 500 2 35 566 502 753 904
20xK650 12 700 – 2 40 733 650 715 1062
– 650 2 40 666 590 885 1062
20xK750 12 800 – 2 40 846 750 825 1170
– 700 2 40 733 650 975 1170
20xK820 (1) 12 900 – 2 35 925 820 902 1170
– 700 2 35 733 650 975 1170
20xK920 13 1000 – 2 40 1038 920 1012 1380
– 900 2 40 925 820 1230 1410
20xK1K0 13 1100 – 2 40 1162 1030 1133 1545
– 1000 2 40 1038 920 1380 1755
20xK1K1 13 1300 – 2 35 1331 1180 1298 1755
– 1100 2 35 1162 1030 1463 1755
20xK1K5 14 1600 – 2 40 1692 1500 1650 2250
– 1400 2 40 1467 1300 1950 2340
20xK1K9(2) 14 2000 – 2 40 2143 1900 2090 2700
– 1600 2 40 1692 1500 2250 2700
20xK2K2(2) 14 2400 – 2 30 2538 2250 2475 3335
– 2000 2 30 2143 1900 2782 3335
(1)
20DK820 drives (ND) are only capable of producing 95% of starting torque under 10 Hz.
(2)
A-12 Specifications
Table A.H 932 Volt DC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Ratings

PWM DC Input
Frame
Drive Catalog kW Rating Freq. Temp. Ratings Output Amps
20xM170 9 160 – 2 40 200 170 187 245
– 132 2 40 170 144 216 245
20xM208 9 200 – 2 35 245 208 230 289
– 160 2 40 200 170 250 289
20xM261 10 250 – 2 40 307 261 287 375
– 200 2 40 245 208 312 375
20xM325 10 315 – 2 40 383 325 358 470
– 250 2 40 307 261 392 470
20xM385 10 355 – 2 40 453 385 424 585
– 315 2 40 383 325 488 585
20xM416 10 400 – 2 35 490 416 458 585
– 315 2 40 383 325 488 585
20xM460 11 450 – 2 40 542 460 506 693
– 355 2 40 453 385 578 693
20xM502 11 500 – 2 40 591 502 552 828
– 400 2 40 542 460 690 828
20xM590 11 560 – 2 35 695 590 649 885
– 500 2 35 591 502 753 904
20xM650 12 630 – 2 40 765 650 715 1062
– 560 2 40 695 590 885 1062
20xM750 12 710 – 2 40 883 750 825 1170
– 630 2 40 765 650 975 1170
20xM820(1) 12 800 – 2 35 965 820 902 1170
– 630 2 35 765 650 975 1170
20xM920 13 900 – 2 40 1038 920 1012 1380
– 800 2 40 925 820 1230 1410
20xM1K0 13 1000 – 2 40 1162 1030 1133 1545
– 900 2 40 1038 920 1380 1755
20xM1K1 13 1100 – 2 35 1331 1180 1298 1755
– 1000 2 35 1162 1030 1463 1755
20xM1K5 14 1500 – 2 40 1766 1500 1650 2250
– 1300 2 40 1530 1300 1950 2340
20xM1K9(2) 14 1800 – 2 40 2237 1900 2090 2700
– 1500 2 40 1766 1500 2250 2700
20xM2K2(2) 14 2000 – 2 30 2649 2250 2475 3335
– 1800 2 30 2237 1900 2782 3335
(1) 20DM820 drives (ND) are only capable of producing 95% of starting torque under 10 Hz.
(2)
Specifications A-13
Drive Fuse & Circuit Breaker The tables on the following pages provide recommended AC line input fuse
Ratings and circuit breaker information. Both types of short circuit protection are
acceptable for UL and IEC requirements. Sizes listed are the recommended
sizes based on 40 degree C and the U.S. N.E.C. Other country, state or local
codes may require different ratings. Tables with DC Link fuse
recommendations are also provided.
Fusing
If fuses are chosen as the desired protection method, refer to the
recommended types listed below. If available amp ratings do not match the
tables provided, the closest fuse rating that exceeds the drive rating should
be chosen.
• IEC – BS88 (British Standard) Parts 1 & 2 (1), EN60269-1, Parts 1 & 2,
type gG or equivalent should be used.
• UL – UL Class T, J or L should be used.
Circuit Breakers
The “non-fuse” listings in the following tables include both circuit breakers
(inverse time or instantaneous trip) and motor circuit protectors for AC
Input drives. If one of these is chosen as the desired protection method,
the following requirements apply.
• IEC and UL – Both types of devices are acceptable for IEC and UL
installations.
(1)
Typical designations include, but may not be limited to the following; Ora 1 & 2:AC, AD, BC, BD, CD, DD, ED,
EFS, EF, FF, FG, GF, GG, GH
A-14 Specifications
Table A.I 400 Volt AC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Protection Devices

Drive Input Circuit Motor Circuit
Catalog Frame kW Rating Ratings Dual Element Time Delay Fuse Non-Time Delay Fuse Bussmann Style Breaker (5) Protector (7)
Number ND HD Amps Min. (2) Max. (3) Min. (2) Max.(3) Semi-Conductor Fuse Max. (6) Max.
20xC261 9 132 - 263 350 550 350 700 170M5813 700 400
- 110 207 275 450 275 600 170M5813 600 300
20xC300 9 160 - 302 400 650 400 900 170M5813 900 400
- 132 247 350 500 350 700 170M5813 700 400
20xC385 10 200 - 388 500 850 500 1100 170M5813 1100 600
- 160 302 400 650 400 900 170M5813 900 400
20xC460 10 250 - 463 600 1000 600 1300 170M8547 1300 600
- 200 388 500 850 500 1100 170M8547 1100 600
20xC500 10 250 - 504 650 1100 650 1500 170M8547 1500 700
- 250 423 550 900 550 1200 170M8547 1200 600
20xC590 11 315 - 594 750 (1 per phs) 1300 750 (1 per phs) 1700 170M5813 1700 800
375 (2 per phs) 375 (2 per phs)
- 250 524 700 (1 per phs) 1100 700 (1 per phs) 1500 170M5813 1500 700
350 (2 per phs) 350 (2 per phs)
425 (2 per phs) 425 (2 per phs)
- 315 594 750 (1 per phs) 1300 750 (1 per phs) 1700 170M5813 1700 800
375 (2 per phs) 375 (2 per phs)
500 (2 per phs) 500 (2 per phs)
- 355 655 850 (1 per phs) 1400 850 (1 per phs) 1900 170M5813 1900 1000
425 (2 per phs) 425 (2 per phs)
550 (2 per phs) 550 (2 per phs)
- 400 735 1000 (1 per phs) 1600 1000 (1 per phs) 2100 170M8547 2100 1200
500 (2 per phs) 500 (2 per phs)
600 (2 per phs) 600 (2 per phs)
- 450 826 1100 (1 per phs) 1800 1100 (1 per phs) 2400 170M8547 2400 1200
550 (2 per phs) 550 (2 per phs)
20xC1K0 12 560 - 1038 1350 (1 per phs) 2300 1350 (1 per phs) 3000 170M8547 3000 1400
700 (2 per phs) 700 (2 per phs)
- 500 927 1200 (1 per phs) 2000 1200 (1 per phs) 2700 170M8547 2700 1200
600 (2 per phs) 600 (2 per phs)
20xC1K1 13 630 - 1158 1350 (1 per phs) 2300 1350 (1 per phs) 3000 170M6466 (4) 3000 1400
700 (2 per phs) 700 (2 per phs)
- 560 1038 1500 (1 per phs) 2500 1500 (1 per phs) 3400 170M6466 (4) 3400 1500
750 (2 per phs) 750 (2 per phs)
(4)
850 (2 per phs) 850 (2 per phs)
(4)
- 630 1158 1500 (1 per phs) 2500 1500 (1 per phs) 3400 170M6466 3400 1500
750 (2 per phs) 750 (2 per phs)
(4)
950 (2 per phs) 950 (2 per phs)
(4)
- 710 1209 1600 (1 per phs) 2700 1600 (1 per phs) 3600 170M6466 3600 1600
800 (2 per phs) 800 (2 per phs)
(1)
825 (3 per phs) 825 (3 per phs)
- 900 1612 2100 (1 per phs) 3500 2100 (1 per phs) 4800 170M6466 4800 2100
700 (3 per phs) 700 (3 per phs)
20xC2K1(1) 14 1200 - 2166 3000 (1 per phs) 4800 3000 (1 per phs) 6400 170M6466 6400 3000
1000 (3 per phs) 1000 (3 per phs)
- 1100 1954 2500 (1 per phs) 4300 2500 (1 per phs) 5800 170M6466 5800 2500
825 (3 per phs) 825 (3 per phs)
20xC2K7(1) 14 1600 - 2720 3500 (1 per phs) 6000 3500 (1 per phs) 8000 170M6466 8000 3500
1200 (3 per phs) 1200 (3 per phs)
- 1300 2317 3000 (1 per phs) 5000 3000 (1 per phs) 6900 170M6466 6900 3000
1000 (3 per phs) 1000 (3 per phs)

(2)
Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping.
(3)
Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection.
(4)
These fuses and disconnect are supplied with AC input NEMA/UL Type 1 drives.
(5)
Inverse time breaker. Ratings shown are maximum.
(6)
Maximum allowable rating by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installation.
Specifications A-15
(7)
Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 125% of motor/drive FLA. Ratings shown are suggested. Instantaneous trip
settings must be set to US NEC code. Not to exceed 1300% FLA.
Table A.J 480 Volt AC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Protection Devices

Drive Frame Input Dual Element Time Delay Circuit Motor Circuit
Catalog HP Rating Ratings Fuse Non-Time Delay Fuse Bussmann Style Breaker (5) Protector (7)
Number ND HD Amps Min. (2) Max. (3) Min. (2) Max. (3) Semi-Conductor Fuse Max. (6) Max.
20xD261 9 200 - 252 350 550 350 700 170M5813 700 400
- 150 207 275 450 275 600 170M5813 600 300
20xD300 9 250 - 290 400 650 400 900 170M5813 900 400
- 200 247 350 550 350 700 170M5813 700 400
20xD385 10 300 - 372 500 850 500 1100 170M5813 1100 600
- 250 302 400 650 400 900 170M5813 900 400
20xD460 10 350 - 444 600 1000 600 1300 170M8547 1300 600
- 300 388 500 850 500 1100 170M8547 1100 600
20xD500 10 450 - 483 650 1000 650 1500 170M8547 1500 700
- 350 423 550 900 550 1200 170M8547 1200 600
20xD590 11 500 - 570 750 (1 per phs) 1300 750 (1 per phs) 1700 170M5813 1700 800
375 (2 per phs) 375 (2 per phs)
- 450 524 700 (1 per phs) 1100 700 (1 per phs) 1500 170M5813 1500 700
350 (2 per phs) 350 (2 per phs)
400 (2 per phs) 400 (2 per phs)
- 500 594 750 (1 per phs) 1300 750 (1 per phs) 1700 170M5813 1700 800
375 (2 per phs) 375 (2 per phs)
450 (2 per phs) 450 (2 per phs)
- 500 655 850 (1 per phs) 1400 850 (1 per phs) 1900 170M5813 1900 900
425 (2 per phs) 425 (2 per phs)
500 (2 per phs) 500 (2 per phs)
- 600 735 900 (1 per phs) 1600 900 (1 per phs) 2100 170M8547 2100 1000
475 (2 per phs) 475 (2 per phs)
600 (2 per phs) 600 (2 per phs)
- 700 826 1100 (1 per phs) 1800 1100 (1 per phs) 2400 170M8547 2400 1200
550 (2 per phs) 550 (2 per phs)
20xD1K0 12 900 - 994 1300 (1 per phs) 2300 1300 (1 per phs) 3000 170M8547 3000 1300
650 (2 per phs) 650 (2 per phs)
- 800 927 1200 (1 per phs) 2000 1200 (1 per phs) 2700 170M8547 2700 1200
600 (2 per phs) 600 (2 per phs)
20xD1K1 13 1000 - 1110 1400 (1 per phs) 2500 1400 (1 per phs) 3400 170M6466 (4) 3400 1400
700 (2 per phs) 700 (2 per phs)
- 900 994 1300 (1 per phs) 2300 1300 (1 per phs) 3000 170M6466 (4) 3000 1300
650 (2 per phs) 650 (2 per phs)
800 (2 per phs) 800 (2 per phs)
- 1000 1110 1400 (1 per phs) 2500 1400 (1 per phs) 3400 170M6466 (4) 3400 1400
700 (2 per phs) 700 (2 per phs)
900 (2 per phs) 900 (2 per phs)
- 1000 1158 1500 (1 per phs) 2700 1500 (1 per phs) 3600 170M6466 (4) 3600 1500
750 (2 per phs) 750 (2 per phs)
20xD1K7(1) 14 1500 - 1709 2200 (1 per phs) 3800 2200 (1 per phs) 5300 170M6466 5300 2200
750 (3 per phs) 750 (3 per phs)
- 1400 1545 2000 (1 per phs) 3600 2000 (1 per phs) 4800 170M6466 4800 2000
675 (3 per phs) 675 (3 per phs)
A-16 Specifications
Drive Input Dual Element Time Delay Circuit Motor Circuit
Frame
900 (3 per phs) 900 (3 per phs)
- 1700 1873 2400 (1 per phs) 4300 2400 (1 per phs) 5800 170M6466 5800 2400
800 (3 per phs) 800 (3 per phs)
1100 (3 per phs) 1100 (3 per phs)
- 2000 2220 2800 (1 per phs) 5000 2800 (1 per phs) 6900 170M6466 6900 2800
900 (3 per phs) 900 (3 per phs)
(1)
(2) Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping.
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7) Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 125% of motor/drive FLA. Ratings shown are suggested. Instantaneous trip
Table A.K 600 Volt AC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Protection Devices

Frame
Number ND HD Amps Min. (3) Max. (4) Min. (3) Max.(4) Semi-Conductor Fuse Max (7) Max.
20xE170 9 150 – 164 225 375 225 500 170M3819 500 250
– 150 139 175 300 175 500 170M3819 500 200
20xE208 9 200 – 201 275 450 275 600 170M3819 600 300
– 150 164 225 375 225 500 170M3819 500 250
20xE261 10 250 – 252 325 575 325 775 170M5813 700 350
– 200 201 275 450 275 600 170M5813 600 300
20xE325 10 350 – 314 400 725 400 950 170M5813 900 450
– 250 252 325 575 325 775 170M5813 750 400
20xE385 10 400 – 372 475 850 475 1100 170M5813 1100 500
– 350 314 400 725 400 950 170M5813 900 450
20xE416 10 450 – 402 525 900 525 1200 170M5813 1200 550
– 350 314 400 725 400 950 170M5813 900 450
20xE460 11 500 – 444 575 (1 per phs) 1000 575 (1 per phs) 1300 170M8547 1300 600
300 (2 per phs) 300 (2 per phs)
– 400 372 475 (1 per phs) 850 475 (1 per phs) 1100 170M8547 1100 500
250 (2 per phs) 250 (2 per phs)
325 (2 per phs) 325 (2 per phs)
– 500 444 575 (1 per phs) 1000 575 (1 per phs) 1300 170M8547 1300 600
300 (2 per phs) 300 (2 per phs)
375(2 per phs) 375(2 per phs)
– 500 485 625 (1 per phs) 1100 625 (1 per phs) 1500 170M5813 1500 700
325 (2 per phs) 325 (2 per phs)
400 (2 per phs) 400 (2 per phs)
– 650 570 725 (1 per phs) 1300 725 (1 per phs) 1700 170M5813 1700 800
375 (2 per phs) 375 (2 per phs)
475 (2 per phs) 475 (2 per phs)
– 700 628 800 (1 per phs) 1400 800 (1 per phs) 1900 170M5813 1900 900
400 (2 per phs) 400 (2 per phs)
20xE820(1) 12 900 – 792 1000 (1 per phs) 1800 1000 (1 per phs) 2400 170M5813 2400 1100
500 (2 per phs) 500 (2 per phs)
– 700 628 800 (1 per phs) 1400 800 (1 per phs) 1900 170M5813 1900 900
400 (2 per phs) 400 (2 per phs)
20xE920 13 1000 – 888 1200 (1 per phs) 2000 1200 (1 per phs) 2700 170M6466 (5) 2700 1200
600 (2 per phs) 600 (2 per phs)
– 900 792 1000 (1 per phs) 1800 1000 (1 per phs) 2400 170M6466 (5) 2400 1100
500 (2 per phs) 500 (2 per phs)
Specifications A-17
Frame
Number ND HD Amps Min. (3) Max. (4) Min. (3) Max.(4) Semi-Conductor Fuse Max (7) Max.
20xE1K0 13 1100 – 994 1300 (1 per phs) 2300 1300 (1 per phs) 3000 170M6466 (5) 3000 1300
650 (2 per phs) 650 (2 per phs)
– 1000 888 1200 (1 per phs) 2000 1200 (1 per phs) 2700 170M6466 (5) 2700 1200
600 (2 per phs) 600 (2 per phs)
20xE1K1 13 1300 – 1139 1500 (1 per phs) 2600 1500 (1 per phs) 3500 170M6466 (5) 3500 1500
750 (2 per phs) 750 (2 per phs)
– 1100 994 1300 (1 per phs) 2200 1300 (1 per phs) 3000 170M6466 (5) 3000 1300
650 (2 per phs) 650 (2 per phs)
20xE1K5 14 1000 – 1448 1900 (1 per phs) 3300 1900 (1 per phs) 4500 170M6466 4500 1900
650 (3 per phs) 650 (3 per phs)
– 900 1255 1600 (1 per phs) 2900 1600 (1 per phs) 3900 170M6466 3900 1700
550 (3 per phs) 550 (3 per phs)
(2)
20xE1K9 14 1100 – 1834 2300 (1 per phs) 4200 2300 (1 per phs) 5700 170M6466 5700 2400
800 (3 per phs) 800 (3 per phs)
– 1000 1448 1900 (1 per phs) 3200 1900 (1 per phs) 4500 170M6466 4500 1900
650 (3 per phs) 650 (3 per phs)
20xE2K2(2) 14 1200 – 2172 2800 (1 per phs) 5000 2800 (1 per phs) 6700 170M6466 6700 2900
950 (3 per phs) 950 (3 per phs)
– 1100 1834 2300 (1 per phs) 4200 2300 (1 per phs) 5700 170M6466 5700 2400
800 (3 per phs) 800 (3 per phs)
(1)
20DE820 drives (ND) are only capable of producing 95% of starting torque under 10 Hz.
(3) Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping.
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 125% of motor/drive FLA. Ratings shown are suggested. Instantaneous trip
Table A.L 690 Volt AC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Protection Devices

Frame
Catalog kW Rating Ratings Dual Element Time Delay Fuse Non-Time Delay Fuse Bussmann Style Breaker (6) Protector (8)
Number ND HD Amps Min. (3) Max. (4) Min. (3) Max. (4) Semi-Conductor Fuse Max. (7)
Max.
20xF170 9 160 – 171 225 375 225 500 170M3819 500 250
– 132 145 200 300 200 500 170M3819 400 200
20xF208 9 200 – 210 275 450 275 600 170M3819 600 300
– 160 171 225 375 225 500 170M3819 500 250
20xF261 10 250 – 263 350 575 350 775 170M5813 750 350
– 200 210 275 450 275 600 170M5813 600 300
20xF325 10 315 – 327 425 725 425 950 170M5813 900 450
– 250 263 350 575 350 775 170M5813 750 400
20xF385 10 355 – 388 500 850 500 1100 170M5813 1100 500
– 315 327 425 725 425 950 170M5813 900 450
20xF416 10 400 – 419 525 900 525 1200 170M5813 1200 550
– 315 327 425 700 425 950 170M5813 900 450
20xF460 11 500 – 463 600 (1 per phs) 1000 600 (1 per phs) 1300 170M8547 1300 600
300 (2 per phs) 300 (2 per phs)
– 400 388 500 (1 per phs) 850 500 (1 per phs) 1100 170M8547 1100 500
250 (2 per phs) 250 (2 per phs)
325 (2 per phs) 325 (2 per phs)
– 500 463 600 (1 per phs) 1000 600 (1 per phs) 1300 170M8547 1300 600
300 (2 per phs) 300 (2 per phs)
375 (2 per phs) 375 (2 per phs)
– 500 506 650 (1 per phs) 1100 650 (1 per phs) 1500 170M5813 1500 700
325 (2 per phs) 325 (2 per phs)
A-18 Specifications
Frame
Catalog kW Rating Ratings Dual Element Time Delay Fuse Non-Time Delay Fuse Bussmann Style Breaker (6) Protector (8)
425 (2 per phs) 425 (2 per phs)
– 560 594 750 (1 per phs) 1300 750 (1 per phs) 1700 170M5813 1700 800
375 (2 per phs) 375 (2 per phs)
475 (2 per phs) 475 (2 per phs)
– 630 655 850 (1 per phs) 1400 850 (1 per phs) 1900 170M5813 1900 900
425 (2 per phs) 425 (2 per phs)
20xF820(1) 12 800 – 826 1100 (1 per phs) 1800 1100 (1 per phs) 2400 170M5813 2400 1100
550 (2 per phs) 550 (2 per phs)
– 630 655 850 (1 per phs) 1400 850 (1 per phs) 1900 170M5813 1900 900
425 (2 per phs) 425 (2 per phs)
20xF920 13 900 – 927 1200 (1 per phs) 2000 1200 (1 per phs) 2700 170M6466 (5) 2700 1200
600 (2 per phs) 600 (2 per phs)
– 800 826 1100 (1 per phs) 1800 1100 (1 per phs) 2400 170M6466 (5) 2400 1100
550 (2 per phs) 550 (2 per phs)
20xF1K0 13 1000 – 1038 1300 (1 per phs) 2300 1300 (1 per phs) 3000 170M6466 (5) 3000 1300
650 (2 per phs) 650 (2 per phs)
– 900 927 1200 (1 per phs) 2000 1200 (1 per phs) 2700 170M6466 (5) 2700 1200
600 (2 per phs) 600 (2 per phs)
20xF1K1 13 1100 – 1189 1500 (1 per phs) 2600 1500 (1 per phs) 3500 170M6466 (5) 3500 1500
750 (2 per phs) 750 (2 per phs)
– 1000 1038 1300 (1 per phs) 2300 1300 (1 per phs) 3000 170M6466 (5) 3000 1300
650 (2 per phs) 650 (2 per phs)
20xF1K5 14 1500 – 1511 1900 (1 per phs) 3300 1900 (1 per phs) 4500 170M6466 4500 1900
650 (3 per phs) 650 (3 per phs)
– 1300 1310 1700 (1 per phs) 2900 1700 (1 per phs) 3900 170M6466 3900 1700
575 (3 per phs) 575 (3 per phs)
20xF1K9(2) 14 1800 – 1914 2400 (1 per phs) 4200 2400 (1 per phs) 5700 170M6466 5700 2400
800 (3 per phs) 800 (3 per phs)
– 1500 1511 1900 (1 per phs) 3200 1900 (1 per phs) 4500 170M6466 4500 1900
650 (3 per phs) 650 (3 per phs)
20xF2K2(2) 14 2000 – 2267 2900 (1 per phs) 5000 2900 (1 per phs) 6700 170M6466 6700 2900
950 (3 per phs) 950 (3 per phs)
– 1800 1914 2400 (1 per phs) 4200 2400 (1 per phs) 5700 170M6466 5700 2400
800 (3 per phs) 800 (3 per phs)
(1)
20DF820 drives (ND) are only capable of producing 95% of starting torque under 10 Hz.
(2)
(3)
Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping.
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8) Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 125% of motor/drive FLA. Ratings shown are suggested. Instantaneous trip
Specifications A-19
Table A.M 540 Volt DC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Protection Devices

kW Rating DC Input Ratings
Drive Catalog Number Frame ND HD Amps Fuse Bussmann Style Fuse
20xH261 9 132 - 307 500 170M6608
- 110 241 500 170M6608
20xH300 9 160 - 353 630 170M6610
- 132 288 630 170M6610
20xH385 10 200 - 453 700 170M6611
- 160 353 700 170M6611
20xH460 10 250 - 541 900 170M6613
- 200 453 900 170M6613
20xH500 10 250 - 589 500 (2 per phs) 170M6608
- 250 494 500 (2 per phs) 170M6608
20xH590 11 315 - 695 550 (2 per phs) 170M6609
- 250 612 550 (2 per phs) 170M6609
20xH650 11 355 - 765 630 (2 per phs) 170M6610
- 315 695 630 (2 per phs) 170M6610
20xH730 11 400 - 859 700 (2 per phs) 170M6611
- 355 765 700 (2 per phs) 170M6611
20xH820 12 450 - 965 700 (2 per phs) 170M6611
- 400 859 700 (2 per phs) 170M6611
20xH920 12 500 - 1083 550 (3 per phs) 170M6609
- 450 965 550 (3 per phs) 170M6609
20xH1K0 12 560 - 1213 630 (3 per phs) 170M6610
- 500 1083 630 (3 per phs) 170M6610
20xH1K1 13 630 - 1354 2400 170M7107
- 560 1213 2400 170M7107
20xH1K3 13 710 - 1530 2400 170M7107
- 630 1354 2400 170M7107
20xH1K4 13 800 - 1707 2400 170M7107
- 710 1413 2400 170M7107
20xH1K7(1) 14 1000 - 2084 – 170M8610
- 900 1883 – 170M8610
20xH2K1(1) 14 1200 - 2531 – 170M8610
- 1100 2284 – 170M8610
20xH2K7(1) 14 1600 - 3178 – 170M8610
- 1300 2708 – 170M8610
(1)
Table A.N 650 Volt DC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Protection Devices

HP Rating DC Input Ratings
20xJ261 9 200 - 294 500 170M6608
- 150 231 500 170M6608
20xJ300 9 250 - 338 630 170M6610
- 200 294 630 170M6610
20xJ385 10 300 - 434 700 170M6611
- 250 338 700 170M6611
20xJ460 10 350 - 519 900 170M6613
- 300 434 900 170M6613
20xJ500 10 450 - 564 500 (2 per phs) 170M6608
- 350 474 500 (2 per phs) 170M6608
20xJ590 11 500 - 666 550 (2 per phs) 170M6609
- 450 587 550 (2 per phs) 170M6609
20xJ650 11 500 - 733 630 (2 per phs) 170M6610
- 500 666 630 (2 per phs) 170M6610
20xJ730 11 600 - 824 700 (2 per phs) 170M6611
- 500 733 700 (2 per phs) 170M6611
20xJ820 12 700 - 925 700 (2 per phs) 170M6611
- 600 824 700 (2 per phs) 170M6611
A-20 Specifications

20xJ920 12 800 - 1038 550 (3 per phs) 170M6609
- 700 925 550 (3 per phs) 170M6609
20xJ1K0 12 900 - 1162 630 (3 per phs) 170M6610
- 800 1038 630 (3 per phs) 170M6610
20xJ1K1 13 1000 - 1297 2400 170M7107
- 900 1162 2400 170M7107
20xJ1K3 13 1200 - 1467 2400 170M7107
- 1000 1297 2400 170M7107
20xJ1K4 13 1250 - 1636 2400 170M7107
- 1000 1354 2400 170M7107
20xJ1K7(1) 14 1500 - 1997 – 170M8610
- 1400 1805 – 170M8610
20xJ2K1(1) 14 1900 - 2425 – 170M8610
- 1700 2189 – 170M8610
20xJ2K7(1) 14 2300 - 3046 – 170M8610
- 2000 2595 – 170M8610
(1)
Table A.O 810 Volt DC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Protection Devices

20xK170 9 150 – 192 400 170M5608
– 150 162 400 170M5608
20xK208 9 200 – 235 450 170M5609
– 150 192 450 170M5609
20xK261 10 250 – 294 450 170M5609
– 200 235 450 170M5609
20xK325 10 350 – 367 550 170M6609
– 250 294 550 170M6609
20xK385 10 400 – 434 700 170M6611
– 350 367 700 170M6611
20xK416 10 450 – 469 800 170M6612
– 350 367 800 170M6612
20xK460 11 500 – 519 450 (2 per phs) 170M5609
– 400 434 450 (2 per phs) 170M5609
20xK502 11 500 – 566 500 (2 per phs) 170M6608
– 500 519 500 (2 per phs) 170M6608
20xK590 11 600 – 666 500 (2 per phs) 170M6608
– 500 566 500 (2 per phs) 170M6608
20xK650 12 700 – 733 500 (2 per phs) 170M6608
– 650 666 500 (2 per phs) 170M6608
20xK750 12 800 – 846 630 (2 per phs) 170M6610
– 700 733 630 (2 per phs) 170M6610
20xK820 (1) 12 900 – 925 630 (2 per phs) 170M6610
– 700 733 630 (2 per phs) 170M6610
20xK920 13 1000 – 1038 2400 170M7107
– 900 925 2400 170M7107
20xK1K0 13 1100 – 1162 2400 170M7107
– 1000 1038 2400 170M7107
20xK1K1 13 1300 – 1331 2400 170M7107
– 1100 1162 2400 170M7107
20xK1K5 14 1600 – 1692 – 170M8610
– 1400 1467 – 170M8610
20xK1K9(2) 14 2000 – 2143 – 170M8610
– 1600 1692 – 170M8610
20xK2K2(2) 14 2400 – 2538 – 170M8610
– 2000 2143 – 170M8610
(1) 20DK820 drives (ND) are only capable of producing 95% of starting torque under 10 Hz.
(2)
Specifications A-21
Table A.P 932 Volt DC Input Frames 9 - 14 Drive Protection Devices

kW Rating DC Input Ratings
20xM170 9 160 – 200 315 170M3746
– 132 170 315 170M3746
20xM208 9 200 – 245 400 170M5742
– 160 200 400 170M5742
20xM261 10 250 – 307 500 170M5744
– 200 245 500 170M5744
20xM325 10 315 – 383 630 170M5746
– 250 307 630 170M5746
20xM385 10 355 – 453 700 170M6745
– 315 383 700 170M6745
20xM416 10 400 – 490 700 170M6745
– 315 383 700 170M6745
20xM460 11 450 – 542 450 (2 per phs) 170M5743
– 355 453 450 (2 per phs) 170M5743
20xM502 11 500 – 591 500 (2 per phs) 170M5744
– 400 542 500 (2 per phs) 170M5744
20xM590 11 560 – 695 500 (2 per phs) 170M5744
– 500 591 500 (2 per phs) 170M5744
20xM650 12 630 – 765 550 (2 per phs) 170M5745
– 560 695 550 (2 per phs) 170M5745
20xM750 12 710 – 883 630 (2 per phs) 170M5746
– 630 765 630 (2 per phs) 170M5746
20xM820(1) 12 800 – 965 630 (2 per phs) 170M5746
– 630 765 630 (2 per phs) 170M5746
20xM920 13 900 – 1038 2400 170M7107
– 800 925 2400 170M7107
20xM1K0 13 1000 – 1162 2400 170M7107
– 900 1038 2400 170M7107
20xM1K1 13 1100 – 1331 2400 170M7107
– 1000 1162 2400 170M7107
20xM1K5 14 1500 – 1766 – 170M8610
– 1300 1530 – 170M8610
20xM1K9(2) 14 1800 – 2237 – 170M8610
– 1500 1766 – 170M8610
20xM2K2(2) 14 2000 – 2649 – 170M8610
– 1800 2237 – 170M8610
(1) 20DM820 drives (ND) are only capable of producing 95% of starting torque under 10 Hz.
(2)
A-22 Specifications
Notes:
Appendix B
Lifting and Mounting Instructions
Lifting Drives
ATTENTION: To guard against possible personal injury and/or
! equipment damage...
• Remove any wiring access covers at the top of the drive.
• Do Not allow any part of the drive or lifting mechanism to
make contact with electrically charged conductors or
components.
• At no time should a person or their limbs be directly
underneath the items being lifted.
• Do not subject the load to high rates of acceleration or
deceleration.
• Inspect all lifting hardware for proper attachment before
lifting drive unit.
• For lifting instructions for frame 9 size drives, see Lifting Frame 9 Size
Drives on page B-2.
• For lifting instructions for frame 10 - 14 size drives, see Lifting Frame
10-14 Size Drives on page B-3.
B-2 Lifting and Mounting Instructions
Lifting Frame 9 Size Drives

Important: When lifting frame 9 drives, a rod must be placed between the
lifting holes as shown in Figure B.1.
Figure B.1 Frame 9 Lifting
Table B.A Frame 9 - Approximate Drive and Enclosure Weights

AC Input Drive, DC Input Drive,
Drive AC Input Drive & Enclosure & DC Input Drive & Enclosure &
Rating Enclosure Packaging Enclosure Packaging
Voltage Class Amps Weight kg (lbs.) Weight kg (lbs.) Weight kg (lbs.) Weight kg (lbs.)
400/480V AC 261 143 (315) 205 (452) 109 (240) 171 (377)
(540/650V DC)
400/480V AC 300 151 (333) 213 (470) 117 (258) 179 (395)
(540/650V DC)
600/690V AC 170 143 (315) 205 (452) 109 (240) 171 (377)
(810/932V DC)
600/690V AC 208 143 (315) 205 (452) 109 (240) 171 (377)
(810/932V DC)
Lifting and Mounting Instructions B-3
Lifting Frame 10-14 Size Drives
When lifting frame 10-14 size drives you must:
• attach the lifting hardware.

• remove the skid and shipping feet.
Step 1: Attaching the Lifting Hardware to the Drive
Important: AC Input frame 14 drives are shipped as multiple enclosure

sections that must be lifted separately and then connected after
they have been properly mounted.
ATTENTION: Do Not lift frame 14 drive enclosure sections

! after they have been connected as one unit. Lifting connected
frame 14 drive enclosure sections as one unit may result in a
hazardous condition that could cause personal injury and/or
equipment damage.
Figure B.2 Frame 14 Shipping Sections

DC Input Drive - AC Input Drive, 1500A - 2 sections shipped.
Lift as one unit. Lift each enclosure section separately.
AC Input Drive, > 1500A - 2 sections shipped.

Lift each enclosure section separately.
Directions for Lifting Drives in Rittal Enclosures (Codes “A” and “H”)
ATTENTION: Always use slings with load rated safety hooks

! or shackles.
A All Size Drives B Frame 10, 11, 13 and 14 Size Drives B Frame 12, 13 and 14 Size Drives
Note: Lift each Frame 14 drive

enclosure section separately.
C Frame 10, 11, 13 and 14 Size Drives C Frame 12, 13 and 14 Size Drives
TIP: To ensure that
the angle between the
roof of the enclosure B>A
and the chain or cable
is greater than 60°, Min. 60°
make the length of the B>A
A
chain or cable
between the center
lifting point and the
corners (B) is longer A Min. 60°
than the distance
between the opposite
corners (A).
Table B.B Frame 10 - 13 Approximate Drive and Enclosure Weights

AC Input Drive & AC Input Drive & DC Input Drive & DC Input Drive &
Frame Drive Rating Enclosure Weight Packaging Weight Enclosure Weight Packaging Weight
Size Voltage Class Amps kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.)
10 400/480V AC 385 382 (842) 432 (952) 267 (589) 317 (699)
(540/650V DC) 460 382 (842) 432 (952) 267 (589) 317 (699)
500 382 (842) 432 (952) 267 (589) 317 (699)
600/690V AC 261 320 (705) 370 (816) 267 (589) 317 (699)
(810/932V DC) 325 351 (774) 401 (884) 267 (589) 317 (699)
385 351 (774) 401 (884) 267 (589) 317 (699)
416 351 (774) 401 (884) 267 (589) 317 (699)
AC Input Drive & AC Input Drive & DC Input Drive & DC Input Drive &
Frame Drive Rating Enclosure Weight Packaging Weight Enclosure Weight Packaging Weight
Size Voltage Class Amps kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.)
11 400/480V AC 590 564 (1243) 614 (1354) 396 (873) 446 (983)
(540/650V DC) 650 564 (1243) 614 (1354) 396 (873) 446 (983)
730 564 (1243) 614 (1354) 396 (873) 446 (983)
600/690V AC 460 511 (1127) 561 (1237) 396 (873) 446 (983)
(810/932V DC) 502 511 (1127) 561 (1237) 396 (873) 446 (983)
590 626 (1380) 676 (1490) 396 (873) 446 (983)
12 400/480V AC 820 814 (1795) 864 (1905) 584 (1287) 634 (1398)
(540/650V DC) 920 814 (1795) 864 (1905) 584 (1287) 634 (1398)
1030 814 (1795) 864 (1905) 584 (1287) 634 (1398)
600/690V AC 650 752 (1658) 802 (1768) 584 (1287) 634 (1398)
(810/932V DC) 750 752 (1658) 802 (1768) 584 (1287) 634 (1398)
820 752 (1658) 802 (1768) 584 (1287) 634 (1398)
13 400/480V AC 1150 1348 (2972) 1468 (3236) 600 (1323) 720 (1587)
(540/650V DC) 1300 1400 (3086) 1520 (3351) 600 (1323) 720 (1587)
1450 1400 (3086) 1520 (3351) 600 (1323) 720 (1587)
600/690V AC 920 1248 (2751) 1368 (3016) 600 (1323) 720 (1587)
(810/932V DC) 1030 1248 (2751) 1368 (3016) 600 (1323) 720 (1587)
1180 1248 (2751) 1368 (3016) 600 (1323) 720 (1587)
Table B.C AC Input Frame 14 Approximate Drive and Enclosure Weights

Section 1 Drive, Section 2 Drive,
Drive Section 1 Drive & Enclosure & Section 2 Drive & Enclosure & Total Drive &
Voltage Rating Enclosure Weight Packaging Weight Enclosure Weight Packaging Weight Enclosure Weight (All
Class Amps kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) Sections) kg (lbs.)
400 1770 1120 (2469) 1240 (2733) 1120 (2469) 1240 (2733) 2240 (4938)
2150 1150 (2535) 1270 (2799) 1150 (2535) 1270 (2799) 2300 (5071)
2700 1920 (4233) 2040 (4497) 1920 (4233) 2040 (4497) 3840 (8466)
600 1500 1270 (2800) 1390 (3064) 650 (1433) 770 (1697) 1920 (4233)
1900 1120 (2469) 1240 (2733) 1120 (2469) 1240 (2733) 2240 (4938)
2250 1150 (2535) 1270 (2799) 1150 (2535) 1270 (2799) 2300 (5071)
Table B.D DC Input Frame 14 Approximate Drive and Enclosure Weights

Voltage Drive Rating Drive & Enclosure Weight Drive, Enclosure & Packaging
Class Amps kg (lbs.) Weight kg (lbs.)
400 1770 1330 (2866) 1450 (3130)
2150 1330 (2866) 1450 (3130)
2700 1330 (2866) 1450 (3130)
600 1500 1220 (2690) 1340 (2954)
1900 1330 (2866) 1450 (3130)
2250 1330 (2866 1450 (3130)
Directions for Lifting Drives in an MCC Enclosure (Code “B”)
ATTENTION: Always use slings with load rated safety hooks

! or shackles.
A All Size Drives B Frame 10 and 11 Size Drives B Frame 12 Size Drives
TO BE USED
C Frame 10 and 11 Size Drives C Frame 12 Size Drives

TIP: The height (of
the lift point) above
the lift angle should
be at least one half LIFT LIFT
"A" (the distance NEVER
POINT
NEVER
POINT
between lift holes). 1/2 A

EXCEED
45°
1/2 A
EXCEED
45°
This assures an or more or more
angle of less than LIFT

ANGLE
LIFT
ANGLE
45° with the vertical.
A A
LIFT LIFT OUTSIDE OUTSIDE

HOLE HOLE LIFT LIFT
HOLE HOLE
Table B.E Frame 10 - 12 Approximate Drive and MCC Style Enclosure (Code “B”)
Weights
Drive Rating Drive & Enclosure Drive, Enclosure & Packaging
Frame Voltage Class Amps Weight kg (lbs.) Weight kg (lbs.)
10 400V AC 385 - 500 454 (1100) 522 (1150)
600V AC 261-416 449 (990) 480 (1058)
11 400 V AC 590 - 730 696 (1535) 719 (1585)
600 V AC 460 - 590 640 (1411) 661 (1457)
12 400 V AC 820 - 1030 966 (2130) 989 (2180)
600 V AC 650 - 820 888 (1958) 909 (2003)
Directions for Lifting NEMA/UL Type 1, IP00/Open Drives (Code “N”)
A All Size Drives B All Size Drives B Frame 14 Drives
AC Choke Output Reactors

(du/dt Filter)
C Frame 10, 11 and 12 Size Drives C Frame 13 and 14 Size Drives
D Frame 10, 11 and 12 Size Drives D Frame 13 and 14 Size Drives
Fasten the module

symmetrically in at
least two (2) holes. Fasten the module symmetrically
in at least two (2) holes.
Table B.F Frames 10 - 12 Open Type Drives - Approximate Weights

Drive Drive AC Input Drive &
Frame Voltage Rating Power Structure AC Choke Weight kg Packaging Weight
Size Class Amps Weight kg (lbs.) (lbs.) kg (lbs.)(4)
10 400 385 120 (265) 115 (254) 235 (519)
460 120 (265) 115 (254) 235 (519)
500 120 (265) 115 (254) 235 (519)
600 261 120 (265) 53 (117) 173 (382)
325 120 (265) 84 (185) 204 (450)
385 120 (265) 84 (185) 204 (450)
416 120 (265) 84 (185) 204 (450)
11 400 590 210 (463) 84 (185)(2) 378 (833)
650 210 (463) 84 (185)(2) 378 (833)
730 210 (463) 84 (185)(2) 378 (833)
600 460 210 (463) 115 (254) 325 (717)
502 210 (463) 115 (254) 325 (717)
590 210 (463) 115 (254)(2) 440 (970)
12 400 820 120 (265)(1) 115 (254)(3) 350 (772)
920 120 (265)(1) 115 (254)(3) 350 (772)
1030 120 (265)(1) 115 (254)(3) 350 (772)
600 650 120 (265)(1) 84 (185)(3) 288 (635)
750 120 (265)(1) 84 (185)(3) 288 (635)
820 120 (265)(1) 84 (185)(3) 288 (635)
(1)
Two power structures are required per frame 12 Drive
(2)
Two AC chokes are required for this frame 11 AC Drive
(3)
Two AC chokes are required per frame 12 AC Drive
(4) DC input drive and packaging weight is equal to the weight of the power structure(s)
Table B.G Frame 13 Open Type Drives - Approximate Weights

Drive Drive
Voltage Rating Power Module Weight kg AC Choke Weight NFE Module Weight
Class Amps (lbs.) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.)
400 1150 306 (675) 130 (287)(1) 67 (148)(1)
1300 306 (675) 115 (254)(2) 67 (148)(2)
1450 306 (675) 115 (254)(2) 67 (148)(2)
600 920 306 (675) 130 (287)(1) 67 (148)(1)
1030 306 (675) 130 (287)(1) 67 (148)(1)
1180 306 (675) 130 (287)(1) 67 (148)(1)
(1)
Two AC chokes and NFE (Non-Regenerative Front-End) Modules are required for this frame 13 AC drive
(2)
Three AC chokes and NFE Modules are required for this frame 13 AC drive
Table B.H Frame 14 Open Type Drives - Approximate Weights

Drive Drive Output Reactor
Voltage Rating Power Module AC Choke NFE Module (du/dt Filter)
Class Amps Weight kg (lbs.) Weight kg (lbs.) Weight kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.)(4)
400 1770 306 (675) 115 (254)(1) 67 (148)(1) 160 (353)
2150 306 (675) 130 (287)(1) 67 (148)(1) 160 (353)
2700 306 (675) 115 (254)(2) 67 (148)(2) 160 (353)
600 1500 306 (675) 115 (254)(3) 67 (148)(3) 120 (265)
1900 306 (675) 115 (254)(1) 67 (148)(1) 160 (353)
2250 306 (675) 130 (287)(1) 67 (148)(1) 160 (353)
(1)
Four AC chokes and NFE Modules are required for this frame 14 AC drive
(2) Six AC chokes and NFE Modules are required for this frame 14 AC drive
(3)
Three AC chokes and NFE Modules are required for this frame 14 AC drive
(4)
Two du/dt filters are required per frame 14 AC drive
Step 2: Removing the Skid and Shipping Feet for Frame 10 - 14 Enclosures
ATTENTION: To guard against personal injury and equipment

! damage, do not work under the drive unless the drive is securely
mounted on appropriate blocks.
Task Description
Using a 15 mm wrench, remove the hardware that secures the drive to the skid.
A
Lift the drive off of the skid.
B
A
A Place the drive on the proper blocks on a hard level surface.
C
The blocks should be approximately 10 cm (4 inches) high.
A Using a 17 mm wrench, remove the hardware that secures the feet to the drive and
D
C
remove the feet.
Frames 10, 11, 13 and 14 (Frame 13 and 14 single enclosures only)
A
B
C
A
D
C D
Frames 12, 13 and 14

Step 3: Mounting Frame 10 - 14 Drive Enclosures to the Floor and/or Wall
1. For AC input frame 14 drives only, secure the foam rubber strip supplied
with the drive to the edge of one of the open-sided drive enclosure
sections.
1500A Drive Shown Apply foam rubber strip to enclosure edge
2. For AC input frame 14 drives only, verify that the holes on the lifting
angles and the four metal connecting plates mounted to the rails between
the enclosures are properly aligned and secure the enclosure sections
using the bolts, washers, nuts and screws provided.
Two M10 bolts, nuts and washers.
Eight M8x20 screws and washers.
Note: Enclosure panels not shown for clarity only.

3. Drives installed in a NEMA/UL Type 12 IP54 enclosure (PowerFlex

700H Control only) are shipped with the roof assembly installed at a
reduced height for shipping purposes. The roof assembly must be
installed at its full height before starting the drive. Follow the steps
below to install the roof assembly.
Note: The NEMA/UL Type 12 IP54 enclosure roof assembly is provided

with the required filters installed.
Task Description
A Remove the two sheet metal screws that secure each of the two roof assembly handles to
the roof panel.
B Lift the roof assembly into place, using the handles provided.
One roof assembly handle

shown for clarity only.
A
Task Description
Secure the roof assembly to the roof panel using the 16 washers and screws provided to .
C
D Remove the two wing nuts that hold the handles in place, remove the two handles and
replace the wing nuts.
One roof assembly handle

shown for clarity only.
4. Complete the appropriate mounting procedures for Floor Mounting

(below) and/or Wall Mounting on page B-14:
Floor Only Mounting
Secure the drive to the floor with anchor bolts in the front corner holes of
the enclosure base plate. Additionally secure the drive using the
mounting plates as needed (Rittal part no. 8800-210 or equivalent). Do
this as far back as possible to the choke assembly plate. With this method
the holes through base plate must be drilled on-site.
Important: If it is important to align the drive cabinet vertically with

adjacent Rittal cabinets, you may need to place shims under
the drive cabinet or use leveling feet throughout the cabinet
line-up. The Allen-Bradley factory may have removed the

standard plastic plugs from the bottom of the cabinet when
installing the shipping feet. This reduces the height of the
cabinet by 2 mm.
Wall Mounting
Secure drive to the floor with anchor bolts in the front corner holes of the
enclosure base plate. Secure the drive by bolting the adjustable lifting
rails to the rear wall or supporting structure.
wall
If you are installing a Frame 14 drive, continue with Step 4: Connecting

Frame 14 Enclosure Sections on page B-15.
Step 4: Connecting Frame 14 Enclosure Sections
1. Secure the cable connected to the PE bar on one enclosure to the PE bar
on the second enclosure using the screw provided.
Connect grounding bars using cable
2. Secure the L-shaped bus bars to the main bus bars at the top of the
enclosures with the M12 bolts, washers and nuts provided. Tightening
torque is 70N•m (619.5 lb.•ft.).
Note: Enclosure panels not shown for clarity only.
Eight M12 bolts, nuts and washers.

3. Route the fiber optic cables from the Power Structure (right-hand
enclosure) to control pan and connect the cables to the 700S Fiber Optic
Interface board on the back of the control plate or the 700H Star Coupler
board on the back of the control frame.
Route Fiber Optic

Cable Bundle.
4. For frame 14 drives rated above 1500 Amps, route the circuit breaker
control cables and terminal plug from the right-hand enclosure and
connect it to the terminal block on the enclosure frame.
Connect circuit breaker connections
terminal plug into the terminal block
Appendix C
PowerFlex 700S Hi-Resolution (Stegmann)

Encoder Feedback Option
Specifications Hi-Resolution (Stegmann) Feedback Option Card Specifications

Consideration Description
Encoder Voltage Supply 11.5V dc @ 130 mA
Stegmann Feedback Sine/Cosine 1V P-P Offset 2.5
Maximum Cable Length 90m (295 ft)
Maximum Frequency 12.5 μs/cycle
(Encoder Speed) (4687.5 RPM for encoders with 1024 sine cycles per revolution)
(9375 RPM for encoders with 512 sine cycles per revolution)
RS-485 Interface The Hi-Resolution Feedback Option card obtains the following
information via the Hiperface RS-485 interface shortly after
power-up:
• Address
• Command Number
• Mode
• Number of turns
• Number of Sine/Cos cycles
• Checksum
Customer-I/O plug (P1) Allen-Bradley PN: S94262912
Supported Encoders
Table C.A specifies which encoders are supported by the 700S
Hi-Resolution Stegmann Encoder Feedback Option module.
Important: Please note that encoders must be ordered as "Single Ended".

This will ensure that the RS-485 channel has the proper
termination network installed at the factory.
Table C.A Supported Stegmann Encoders
Model Resolution Comment
SINCOS® SCS-60, SCS-70, 512 sine cycles per revolution. SCM-60 and SCM-70 have built-in
SCM-60, and SCM-70 mechanical turns counter.
SINCOS® SCS-KIT-101 and 1024 sine cycles per revolution. SCM-60 and SCM-70 have built-in
SCM-KIT-101 mechanical turns counter.
SINCOS® SRS-50, SRS-60, 1024 sine cycles per revolution. SRM-50 and SRM-60 have built-in
SRM-50, and SRM-60 mechanical turns counter.
SINCOS® SRS/M 25 1024 sine cycles per revolution SRS25 and SRM25 have built-in
mechanical turns counter. IP65
Protection Class. Size 25 square
flange mounting.
C-2 PowerFlex 700S Hi-Resolution (Stegmann) Encoder Feedback Option

SINCOS® SRS660 1024 sine cycles per revolution Hollow-shaft up to 14 mm diameter
SINCOS® SHS-170 512 sine cycles per revolution. While the software supports this
encoder, the SHS-170 draws
excessive current and should only be
used with an external power supply.
Allen-Bradley 842HR 1024 sine cycles per revolution Has built-in mechanical turns
counter. IP65 Protection Class.
Size 25 square flange mounting.
SINCOS®, SINCODER® and LINCODER® are registered trademarks of Stegmann Inc.
Wiring the Hi-Resolution Terminal block P1 contains connection points for a Stegmann Hiperface®
Feedback Option Card to an encoder. This terminal block resides on the Hi-Resolution Encoder
Encoder Feedback Option card.
Hiperface® is a registered trademark of Stegmann Inc.
TIP: Remember to route wires through the sliding access

panel at the bottom of the Control Assembly.
12 POWER COMMON Power supply for encoder interface.
9 10 11 12
11 POWER
10 REFSIN Negative Sine signal.
9 +SIN Positive Sine signal.
7 8
8 REFCOS Negative Cosine signal.

7 +COS Positive Cosine signal.
3 4 5 6
6 SHIELD Connection point for encoder cable

5 SHIELD shield.
4 N/C Not connected.
1 2
3 N/C
2 DATA+ (RS 485) Positive DH485 terminal.
1 DATA- (RS 485) Negative DH485 terminal.
PowerFlex 700S Hi-Resolution (Stegmann) Encoder Feedback Option C-3
Recommended Cables
If you are using this motor and feedback

device: Use this cable: See this wiring diagram:
Allen-Bradley 1326AB-BXXXX-21ML, and Allen-Bradley 1326-CECU-XXL-XXX Figure C.1 on page C-4
-21MKXL motors with embedded Stegmann
rotary encoder
Allen-Bradley 1326AB-BXXXX-M2L, -M2KXL, Allen-Bradley 2090-CDNFDMP-SXX Figure C.2 on page C-4
-S2L, and -S2KXL motors with embedded
Stegmann rotary encoder
Allen-Bradley MPL-A5xx and all MPL-Bxxx Allen-Bradley 2090-CDNFDMP-SXX Figure C.2 on page C-4
motors with embedded Stegmann rotary
encoder
Allen-Bradley 1326AB-BXXXX-M2L, -M2KXL, Allen-Bradley 2090-XXNFMP-SXX Figure C.3 on page C-4
-S2L, and -S2KXL motors with embedded
Allen-Bradley MPL-A5xx and all MPL-Bxxx Allen-Bradley 2090-XXNFMP-SXX Figure C.3 on page C-4
motors with embedded Stegmann rotary
encoder
Allen-Bradley MPL-A3xx - MPL-A45xx and all Allen-Bradley 2090-XXNFMP-SXX Figure C.4 on page C-5
MPG series motors with embedded
Allen-Bradley MPL-A3xx - MPL-A45xx and all Allen-Bradley 2090-UXNFDMP-SXX Figure C.5 on page C-5
MPG series motors with embedded
Any other motor with external Stegmann Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 12-pin DIN style connector Figure C.6 on page C-5
SHS-170 rotary encoder
Any other motor with external Stegmann Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 10-pin MS style connector Figure C.7 on page C-6
SCS-60, SCS-70, SCM-60 or SCM-70,
SRS-50, SRS-60, SRM-60, SRM-60,
SRS-25, SRM-25 or Allen-Bradley 842HR
rotary encoder
Any other motor with external Stegmann Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 8-pin Berg style connector Figure C.8 on page C-6
SCS-Kit 101 or SCK-Kit 101 rotary encoder
Any other motor with external Stegmann Is available only with pre-attached Stegmann shielded twisted-pair Figure C.9 on page C-6
SRS660 rotary encoder cable of various lengths
Connection Examples
Figure C.1 1326AB-BXXXX-21ML, and -21MKXL motors with a 1326-CECU-XXL-XXX cable
Hi-Res Feedback Option Board ENCODER
WH BK
POWER COMMON 12 A POWER
BK WH
POWER 11 B POWER COMMON
BK BK
REFSIN 10 C REFSIN
RD RD
+SIN 9 D +SIN
BK BK
REFCOS 8 E REFCOS
BU BU
+COS 7 F +COS
SHIELD 6 BK
G DATA+ (RS-485)
SHIELD 5 GN
H DATA- (RS-485)
N/C 4 I SHIELD
N/C 3 J OVERALL SHIELD
BK
DATA+ (RS 485) 2
GN
DATA- (RS 485) 1
Figure C.2 MPL-A5xx and all MPL-Bxxx motors or 1326AB-BXXXX-M2L, -M2KXL, -S2L, and -S2KXL motors with
2090-CDNFDMP-SXX cable
WH/OR BK
POWER COMMON 12 A +SIN
OR BK/WH
POWER 11 B REFSIN
BK/WH RD
REFSIN 10 C +COS
BK WH/RD
+SIN 9 D REFCOS
WH/RD GN
REFCOS 8 E DATA+ (RS-485)
RD WH/GN
+COS 7 F DATA- (RS 485)
SHIELD 6 OR
N POWER
SHIELD 5 WH/OR
P COMMON
BU BU
N/C 4 R TS+
WH/BU WH/BU
N/C 3 S TS-
GN
DATA+ (RS 485) 2
WH/GN
DATA- (RS 485) 1
Figure C.3 MPL-A5xx and all MPL-Bxxx Motor or 1326AB-BXXXX-M2L, -M2KXL, -S2L, and -S2KXL motor with
2090-XXNFMP-SXX cable
WH/GY BK
OR BK/WH
POWER 11 B REFSIN
BK/WH RD
REFSIN 10 C +COS
BK WH/RD
+SIN 9 D REFCOS
WH/RD GN
RD WH/GN
SHIELD 6 OR
N POWER
SHIELD 5 WH/GY
P COMMON
N/C 4 R TS+
N/C 3 S TS-
GN
DATA+ (RS 485) 2
WH/GN
DATA- (RS 485) 1
Note: Thermal Switch cannot be accessed using 2090-XXNFMP-SXX cable.

PowerFlex 700S Hi-Resolution (Stegmann) Encoder Feedback Option C-5
Connection Examples
Figure C.4 MPL-A3xx - MPL-A45xx and all MPG series motors with 2090-XXNFMP-SXX cable
WH/GY BK
GY BK/WH
POWER 11 B REFSIN
BK/WH RD
REFSIN 10 C +COS
BK WH/RD
+SIN 9 D REFCOS
WH/RD GN
RD WH/GN
SHIELD 6 GY
K POWER
SHIELD 5 WH/GY
L COMMON
N/C 4 R TS+
N/C 3 S TS-
GN
DATA+ (RS 485) 2
WH/GN
DATA- (RS 485) 1

Figure C.5 MPL-A3xx - MPL-A45xx and all MPG series motors with 2090-UXNFDMP-SXX cable
WH/GY BK
GY BK/WH
POWER 11 B REFSIN
BK/WH RD
REFSIN 10 C +COS
BK WH/RD
+SIN 9 D REFCOS
WH/RD GN
RD WH/GN
SHIELD 6 GY
K POWER
SHIELD 5 WH/GY
L COMMON
BU BU
N/C 4 R TS+
WH/BU WH/BU
N/C 3 S TS-
GN
DATA+ (RS 485) 2
WH/GN
DATA- (RS 485) 1
Figure C.6 Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 12-pin DIN style connector

BU RD
POWER COMMON 12 12 POWER
RD
POWER 11 11 N/C
BN BU
REFSIN 10 10 POWER COMMON
WH
+SIN 9 9 SHIELD
BK PK
REFCOS 8 8 +COS
PK GN
+COS 7 7 DATA- (RS 485)
SHIELD 6 BN
6 REFSIN
SHIELD 5 WH
5 +SIN
N/C 4 4 N/C
N/C 3 3 N/C
GY GY
DATA+ (RS 485) 2 2 DATA+ (RS 485)
GN BK
DATA- (RS 485) 1 1 REFCOS
Connection Examples
Figure C.7 Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 10-pin MS style connector

BU RD
POWER COMMON 12 A POWER
RD BU
POWER 11 B POWER COMMON
BN BN
REFSIN 10 C REFSIN
WH BK
+SIN 9 D REFCOS
BK GY
REFCOS 8 E DATA+ (RS 485)
PK GN
SHIELD 6 WH
G +SIN
SHIELD 5 PK
H +COS
N/C 4 I N/C
N/C 3 J SHIELD
GY
DATA+ (RS 485) 2
GN
DATA- (RS 485) 1
Figure C.8 Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 8-pin Berg style connector

BU RD
RD BU
POWER 11 2 POWER COMMON
BN BN
REFSIN 10 3 REFSIN
WH BK
+SIN 9 4 REFCOS
BK GY
REFCOS 8 5 DATA+ (RS 485)
PK GN
+COS 7 6 DATA- (RS 485)
SHIELD 6 WH
7 +SIN
SHIELD 5 PK
8 +COS
N/C 4
N/C 3
GY
DATA+ (RS 485) 2
GN
DATA- (RS 485) 1
Figure C.9 Pre-attached Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable

BU RD
RD BU
POWER 11 2 POWER COMMON
BN BN
REFSIN 10 3 REFSIN
WH BK
+SIN 9 4 REFCOS
BK GY
REFCOS 8 5 DATA+ (RS 485)
PK GN
+COS 7 6 DATA- (RS 485)
SHIELD 6 WH
7 +SIN
SHIELD 5 PK
8 +COS
N/C 4
N/C 3
GY
DATA+ (RS 485) 2
GN
DATA- (RS 485) 1
Appendix D
PowerFlex 700S Resolver Feedback Option

Card
Specifications Resolver Feedback Option Card Specifications

Excitation Frequency 2381-9300 Hz
Excitation Voltage 8-26 Vrms
Resolver Feedback Voltage 2 Vrms +/- 300 mV
Compatible Resolvers
Table A specifies which resolvers are supported by the 700S Resolver
Feedback Option module.
Table A Compatible Resolvers
Parameter 275 Parameter 275
[Reslvr0 Type Sel] [Reslvr0 Type Sel]
Manufacturer Setting for Phase I Setting for Phase I
Manufacturer Catalog Number Notes Firmware 1.17 Firmware 2.XX
Tamagawa TS-2014N181E32 x 1, flange-mounted 1 - Rel800123-2R 1 - T2014/2087x1
enclosure
Tamagawa TS-2014N182E32 x 2, flange-mounted 2 - Rel800123-2S 2 - T2014/2087x2
enclosure
Tamagawa TS-2014N185E32 x 5, flange-mounted 3 - Rel800123-2T 3 - T2014/2087x2
enclosure
Tamagawa TS-2087N12E9 x 2, HD foot-mounted 2 - Rel800123-2S 2 - T2014/2087x2
enclosure, double shaft
Tamagawa TS-2087N1E9 x 1, HD foot-mounted 1 - Rel800123-2R 1 - T2014/2087x1
enclosure
Tamagawa TS-2087N2E9 x 2, HD foot-mounted 2 - Rel800123-2S 2 - T2014/2087x2
enclosure
Tamagawa TS-2087N5E9 x 5, HD foot-mounted 3 - Rel800123-2T 3 - T2014/2087x2
enclosure
Tamagawa TS-2087N11E9 x 1, HD foot-mounted 1 - Rel800123-2R 1 - T2014/2087x1
enclosure, double shaft
Advanced Micro R11X-C10/7 N/A 14 - AmciR11XC107
Controls Inc.
(AMCI)
D-2 PowerFlex 700S Resolver Feedback Option Card
Allen-Bradley servo motors may be ordered with factory installed

resolvers. Table B specifies which factory installed resolvers are
supported by the 700S Resolver Feedback Option module.
Table B Compatibility with Resolvers on Allen-Bradley Motors
Parameter 275 Parameter 275 Parameter 277
[Reslvr0 Type Sel] [Reslvr0 Type Sel] [Reslvr0 Type Sel]
Setting for Phase I Setting for Phase I Setting for Phase II
Motor / Resolver Type Compatible Notes Firmware 1.17 Firmware 2.XX Firmware 1.XX
1326 AB 230V Primary Resolver No Receiver type resolver - not Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported
supported
1326 AB 460V Primary Resolver Yes Transmitter type resolver - 9 - AB 164982-8 9 - 1326Ax 460v 9 - 1326Ax 460v
supported
1326 AB 460V Secondary Yes • Secondary resolver is 13 - AB 129214-8 13 - Reserved 13 - Reserved
Resolver geared to motor - not
intended for motor speed /
position feedback
• Transmitter type resolver -
supported
1326AD 230V Rare Earth No Receiver type resolver - not Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported
Primary Resolver supported
1326AH 460V Explosion Proof Yes Transmitter type resolver - 9 - AB 164982-8 9 - 1326Ax 460v 9 - 1326Ax 460v
Motor Primary Resolver supported
1326AH 460V Explosion Proof Yes • Secondary resolver is N/A N/A N/A
Motor Secondary Resolver geared to motor - not
intended for motor speed /
position feedback
• Transmitter type resolver -
supported
1326AS 460V Rare Earth Yes Transmitter type resolver - 9 - AB 164982-8 9 - 1326Ax 460v 9 - 1326Ax 460v
Primary Resolver supported
MPL 460V Primary Resolver Yes Transmitter type resolver - 4 - AB 155407-8 4 - MPL 460v 4 - MPL 460v
supported
Recommended Cable
Rockwell Automation strongly recommends the use of Reliance Electric
417900-207CG or Belden 9730 cable for installation, or an equivalent cable
that meets these specifications:
• 3 Twisted Pairs, 80°C, 300V

• Chrome FPR Jacket, Plenum Rated
• Conductor Size: 18 AWG
• Twists Per Inch: 2-3 twists per inch of wire lay per pair
• Capacitance Per Pair: not to exceed 30 pF per foot +/- 0.3 pF as read on a
GEN_RAD Model 1658 RLC Digibridge or equivalent
• Capacitance Difference Pair to Pair: not to exceed 0.6 pF per foot as read
on a GEN_RAD Model 1658 RLC Digibridge or equivalent
• Resistance per 1000 Feet: 17.15Ω +/- 10%
• Inductance per 1000 Feet: 0.13 mH +/- 10% as read on a GEN_RAD
Model 1658 RLC Digibridge or equivalent
• Insulation Thickness: 0.008 in.
• Conductor Stranding 16/30
• Jacket Thickness: 0.018 in.
PowerFlex 700S Resolver Feedback Option Card D-3
Wiring the Resolver

Feedback Option Card to a 8 REF HIGH Positive Reference signal
Resolver 7 SHIELD Connection point for resolver cable
7 8
shield
6
6 REF LOW Negative Reference signal
1 2 3 4 5
5 SIN HIGH Positive Sine signal
4 SHIELD Connection point for resolver cable
shield
3 SIN LOW Negative Sine signal
2 COS HIGH Positive Cosine signal
1 COS LOW Negative Cosine signal
D-4 PowerFlex 700S Resolver Feedback Option Card
Connection Examples
Resolver Interface - Clockwise Rotation = Count Up
- +
REF HIGH 8 REF
-
SHIELD 7 +
SIN COS
REF LOW 6
SIN HIGH 5 - +
SHIELD 4
SIN LOW 3
COS HIGH 2
COS LOW 1
Resolver Interface - Clockwise Rotation = Count Down (Reverse Polarity of Sine or Cosine Signals)
- +
REF HIGH 8 REF
-
GROUND 7 +
SIN COS
REF LOW 6
SIN HIGH 5 - +
GROUND 4
SIN LOW 3
COS HIGH 2
COS LOW 1
- +
REF HIGH 8 REF
-
SHIELD 7 +
SIN COS
REF LOW 6
SIN HIGH 5 - +
SHIELD 4
SIN LOW 3
COS HIGH 2
COS LOW 1
Appendix E
PowerFlex 700S Multi-Device Interface Option

Card
Specifications MDI Option Card Specifications

Rotary Encoder Voltage Supply 11.5V dc @ 130 mA
Rotary Encoder Hi-Resolution Feedback Sine/Cosine 1V P-P Offset 2.5
Rotary Encoder Maximum Cable Length 90m (295 ft.)
Linear Encoder Maximum Cable Length 245m (800 ft.)
Rotary Encoder RS-485 Interface The MDI Option card obtains the following information via
the Hiperface RS-485 interface shortly after power-up:
• Address
• Command Number
• Mode
• Number of turns
• Number of Sine/Cos cycles
• Checksum
Registration Inputs high speed 12-24V DC sinking digital inputs
Weidmuller PN: 67601782
Supported Linear Sensors

Temposonics® R-Series Linear sensors with MTS® part numbers ending in
1S2G1102 work with the MDI Option.
Part Number
Character Characteristic
1 Input Voltage = +24VDC
S SSI output
2 Data Length = 24 Bits
G Output Format = Gray Code
1 Resolution = 0.005 mm
1 Performance = Standard
02 Scale Orientation = Forward-acting Synchronized
Temposonics® is a registered trademark of MTS Systems Corporation.

E-2 PowerFlex 700S Multi-Device Interface Option Card
Supported Rotary Encoders

Please note that encoders must be ordered as "Single Ended". This will
ensure that the RS-485 channel has the proper termination network installed
at the factory.
SINCOS® SCS-60, SCS-70, 512 sine cycles per revolution. SCM-60 and SCM-70 have built-in
SCM-60, and SCM-70 mechanical turns counter.
SINCOS® SCS-KIT-101 and 1024 sine cycles per revolution. SCM-60 and SCM-70 have built-in
SCM-KIT-101 mechanical turns counter.
SINCOS® SRS-50, SRS-60, 1024 sine cycles per revolution. SRM-50 and SRM-60 have built-in
SRM-50, and SRM-60 mechanical turns counter.
SINCOS® SRS/M 25 1024 sine cycles per revolution SRS25 and SRM25 have built-in
mechanical turns counter. IP65
Protection Class. Size 25 square
flange mounting.
SINCOS® SRS660 1024 sine cycles per revolution Hollow-shaft up to 14 mm diameter
SINCOS® SHS-170 512 sine cycles per revolution. While the software supports this
encoder, the SHS-170 draws
excessive current and should only be
used with an external power supply.
SINCOS®, SINCODER® and LINCODER® are registered trademarks of Stegmann Inc.
Recommended Cables
If you are using this motor and feedback device: Use this cable: See this wiring diagram:
Temposonics R-Series Linear sensors with MTS part Mating MTS molded extension cable for RG connector or integral Figure E.1 on page E-3
numbers ending in 1S2G1102 P cable
Allen-Bradley 1326AB-BXXXX-M2L, -M2KXL, -S2L, Allen-Bradley 2090-CDNFDMP-SXX Figure E.2 on page E-4
and -S2KXL motors with embedded Stegmann rotary
encoder
Allen-Bradley MPL-A5xx and MPL-Bxxx motors Allen-Bradley 2090-CDNFDMP-SXX Figure E.2 on page E-4
motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder
Allen-Bradley 1326AB-BXXXX-M2L, -M2KXL, -S2L, Allen-Bradley 2090-XXNFMP-SXX Figure E.3 on page E-4
and -S2KXL motors with embedded Stegmann rotary
encoder
Allen-Bradley MPL-A5xx and MPL-Bxxx motors Allen-Bradley 2090-XXNFMP-SXX Figure E.3 on page E-4
motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder
Allen-Bradley MPL-A3xx - MPL-A45xx and all MPG Allen-Bradley 2090-XXNFMP-SXX Figure E.4 on page E-4
series motors with embedded Stegmann rotary
encoder
Allen-Bradley MPL-A3xx - MPL-A45xx and all MPG Allen-Bradley 2090-UXNFDMP-SXX Figure E.5 on page E-5
series motors with embedded Stegmann rotary
encoder
Any other motor with external Stegmann SHS-170 Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 12-pin DIN style Figure E.6 on page E-5
rotary encoder connector
Any other motor with external Stegmann SCS-60, Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 10-pin MS style Figure E.7 on page E-5
SCS-70, SCM-60 or SCM-70, SRS-50, SRS-60, connector
SRM-60, SRM-60, SRS-25 or SRM-25 rotary encoder
Any other motor with external Stegmann SCS-Kit 101 Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 8-pin Berg style Figure E.8 on page E-6
or SCK-Kit 101 rotary encoder connector
Any other motor with external Stegmann SRS660 Is available only with pre-attached Stegmann shielded Figure E.9 on page E-6
rotary encoder twisted-pair cable of various lengths
PowerFlex 700S Multi-Device Interface Option Card E-3
Wiring the MDI Option

17 Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Power supply for Rotary Encoder interface
16 Rotary Encoder POWER
15 Rotary Encoder REFSIN Positive Sine signal for Rotary Encoder interface
14 Rotary Encoder +SIN Negative Sine signal for Rotary Encoder interface
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
13 Rotary Encoder REFCOS Negative Cosine signal for Rotary Encoder interface
12 Rotary Encoder +COS Positive Cosine signal for Rotary Encoder interface
11 Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) Positive DH485 terminal for Rotary Encoder interface
10 Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) Negative DH485 terminal for Rotary Encoder interface
9 Linear Sensor CLOCK+ Positive Clock terminal for Linear Sensor interface
8 Linear Sensor CLOCK- Negative Clock terminal for Linear Sensor interface
7 Linear Sensor DATA+ Positive SSI terminal for Linear Sensor interface
8
6 Linear Sensor DATA- Negative SSI terminal for Linear Sensor interface
7
5 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION+ Positive terminal for Rotary Encoder registration strobe
6
5
4 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION- Negative terminal for Rotary Encoder registration strobe
4
3 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION+ Positive terminal for Linear Sensor registration strobe
3
2 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION- Negative terminal for Linear Sensor registration strobe
2
1 CHASSIS GND Connection point for cable shields

1
Connection Examples
Figure E.1 Linear Sensor connections with MDI RG connector or P integral cable
EXTERNAL
24 Vdc POWER RD or BN
POWER COMMON WH
SUPPLY
MDI Feedback Option Board
Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON 17
Rotary Encoder POWER 16
Rotary Encoder REFSIN 15
Rotary Encoder +SIN 14
LINEAR SENSOR
Rotary Encoder REFCOS 13
Rotary Encoder +COS 12 7 No Connection
WH
Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) 11 6 DC Ground
RD or BN
Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) 10 5 +24 Vdc
YE GN
Linear Sensor CLOCK+ 9 4 (-) CLOCK
GN YE
Linear Sensor CLOCK- 8 3 (+) CLOCK
GY GY
Linear Sensor DATA+ 7 2 (+) DATA
Linear Sensor DATA- PK PK
6 1 (-) DATA
Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION+ 5
Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION- 4
Linear Sensor REGISTRATION+ 3
Linear Sensor REGISTRATION- 2
CHASSIS GND 1
Connection Examples
Figure E.2 Rotary Encoder connections for MPL-A5xx and MPL-Bxxx motors or 1326AB-BXXXX-M2L, -M2KXL, -S2L, and
-S2KXL motors with 2090-CDNFDMP-SXX cable
ROTARY ENCODER
WH/OR BK
Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON 17 A +SIN
OR BK/WH
Rotary Encoder POWER 16 B REFSIN
BK/WH RD
Rotary Encoder REFSIN 15 C +COS
BK WH/RD
Rotary Encoder +SIN 14 D REFCOS
WH/RD GN
Rotary Encoder REFCOS 13 E DATA+ (RS-485)
RD WH/GN
Rotary Encoder +COS 12 F DATA- (RS 485)
GN OR
Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) 11 N POWER
WH/GN WH/OR
Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) 10 P COMMON
BU BU
Linear Sensor CLOCK+ 9 R TS+
WH/BU WH/BU
Linear Sensor CLOCK- 8 S TS-
Linear Sensor DATA+ 7
Linear Sensor DATA- 6
CHASSIS GND 1
Figure E.3 Rotary Encoder connections for MPL-A5xx and MPL-Bxxx motors or 1326AB-BXXXX-M2L, -M2KXL, -S2L, and
-S2KXL motors with 2090-XXNFMP-SXX cable
ROTARY ENCODER
WH/GY BK
OR BK/WH
BK/WH RD
BK WH/RD
WH/RD GN
RD WH/GN
GN OR
WH/GN WH/GY
CHASSIS GND 1

Figure E.4 Rotary Encoder connections for MPL-A3xx - MPL-A45xx and all MPG series motors with 2090-XXNFMP-SXX
cable
ROTARY ENCODER
WH/GY BK
GY BK/WH
BK/WH RD
BK WH/RD
WH/RD GN
RD WH/GN
GN GY
WH/GN WH/GY
CHASSIS GND 1

PowerFlex 700S Multi-Device Interface Option Card E-5
Connection Examples
Figure E.5 Rotary Encoder connections for MPL-A3xx - MPL-A45xx and all MPG series motors with 2090-UXNFDMP-SXX
cable
MDI Feedback Option Board ENCODER
WH/GY BK
GY BK/WH
BK/WH RD
BK WH/RD
WH/RD GN
RD WH/GN
GY
K POWER
Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) 11 WH/GY
L COMMON
Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) 10 BU BU
R TS+
Linear Sensor CLOCK+ 9 WH/BU WH/BU
S TS-
Linear Sensor CLOCK- 8
GN
WH/GN
CHASSIS GND 1
Figure E.6 Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 12-pin DIN style connector
MDI Feedback Option Board ROTARY ENCODER

BU RD
Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON 17 12 POWER
RD
Rotary Encoder POWER 16 11 N/C
BN BU
Rotary Encoder REFSIN 15 10 POWER COMMON
WH
Rotary Encoder +SIN 14 9 SHIELD
BK PK
Rotary Encoder REFCOS 13 8 +COS
Rotary Encoder +COS 12 PK GN 7 DATA- (RS 485)
GY BN
Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) 11 6 REFSIN
GN WH
Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) 10 5 +SIN
Linear Sensor CLOCK+ 9 4 N/C
Linear Sensor CLOCK- 8 3 N/C
GY
Linear Sensor DATA+ 7 2 DATA+ (RS 485)
Linear Sensor DATA- BK
6 1 REFCOS
CHASSIS GND 1
Figure E.7 Rotary Encoder connections with Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable and 10-pin MS style connector

BU RD
Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON 17 A POWER
RD BU
Rotary Encoder POWER 16 B POWER COMMON
BN BN
Rotary Encoder REFSIN 15 C REFSIN
WH BK
BK GY
Rotary Encoder REFCOS 13 E DATA+ (RS 485)
Rotary Encoder +COS 12 PK GN F DATA- (RS 485)
GY WH
Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) 11 G +SIN
GN PK
Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) 10 H +COS
Linear Sensor CLOCK+ 9 I N/C
Linear Sensor CLOCK- 8 J SHIELD
CHASSIS GND 1
Connection Examples
Figure E.8 Rotary Encoder connections with Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable and 8-pin Berg style connector

BU RD
Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON 17 1 POWER
RD BU
Rotary Encoder POWER 16 2 POWER COMMON
BN BN
Rotary Encoder REFSIN 15 3 REFSIN
WH BK
Rotary Encoder +SIN 14 4 REFCOS
BK GY
Rotary Encoder REFCOS 13 5 DATA+ (RS 485)
Rotary Encoder +COS 12 PK GN 6 DATA- (RS 485)
Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) 11 WH
7 +SIN
PK
Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) 10 8 +COS
Linear Sensor CLOCK+ 9
GY
GN
CHASSIS GND 1
Figure E.9 Rotary Encoder connections with Stegmann pre-attached shielded twisted-pair cable

BU BU
Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON 17 POWER COMMON
RD RD
Rotary Encoder POWER 16 POWER
BN BN
Rotary Encoder REFSIN 15 REFSIN
WH WH
Rotary Encoder +SIN 14 +SIN
BK BK
Rotary Encoder REFCOS 13 REFCOS
Rotary Encoder +COS 12 PK PK +COS
Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) 11 GY
DATA+ (RS 485)
GN
Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) 10 DATA- (RS 485)
GY
GN
CHASSIS GND 1
Figure E.10 Registration Sensor connection

EXTERNAL
12 or 24 Vdc POWER
POWER COMMON
SUPPLY
Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON 17
Rotary Encoder POWER 16
Rotary Encoder REFSIN 15
Rotary Encoder +SIN 14 Rotary
Registration Sensor
Rotary Encoder REFCOS 13
Rotary Encoder +COS 12 + Power
Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) 11
Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) 10 Common
Linear Sensor DATA+ 7 Linear
Linear Sensor DATA- 6 Registration Sensor
+ Power
Common
CHASSIS GND 1
Appendix F
Instructions for ATEX Approved PowerFlex

700H Drives in Group II Category (2)
Applications with ATEX Approved Motors
General Information This document provides information on operation of an ATEX(1) Approved

drive and ATEX approved motor. The motor is located in a defined
hazardous environment, while the drive is not. A protective system is
required to stop current flow to the motor when an over temperature
condition has been sensed in the motor. When sensed, the drive will go into
a stop condition. To restart the drive, the over temperature condition must be
resolved, followed by a valid start command to the drive. The PowerFlex
700H drive must have the 20C-DG1 option board installed in slot B of the
control assembly for ATEX applications. Refer to 700H Control Circuit
Board Designations on page 2-2 for more information.
The drive is manufactured under the guidelines of the ATEX directive 94/9/
EC. These drives are in Group II Category (2) Applications with ATEX
Approved Motors. Certification of the drive for the ATEX group and
category on its nameplate requires installation, operation, and maintenance
according to the requirements found in this document and the appropriate
Motor Instruction Manual(s).
ATTENTION: Operation of this ATEX certified drive with an

! ATEX certified motor that is located in a hazardous environment
requires additional installation, operation, and maintenance
procedures beyond those stated in the standard user manual.
Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if all
additional instructions in this document are not observed.
Motor Requirements • The motor must be manufactured under the guidelines of the ATEX
directive 94/9/EC. It must be installed, operated, and maintained per the
motor manufacturer supplied instructions.
• Only motors with nameplates marked for use on an inverter power
source, and labeled for specific hazardous areas, may be used in
hazardous areas on inverter (variable frequency) power.
• When the motor is indicated for ATEX Group II Category 2 for use in
gas environments (Category 2G) the motor must be of flameproof
construction, EEx d (according to EN50018) or Ex d (according to
EN60079-1 or IEC60079-1). Group II motors are marked with a
temperature or a temperature code.
(1)
ATEX is the French acronym for “Atmosphères Explosibles” which translates to Explosive Atmospheres in
English.
F-2 Instructions for ATEX Approved PowerFlex 700H Drives in Group II Category (2) Applications with ATEX Approved Motors
• When the motor is indicated for ATEX Group II Category 2 for use in
dust environments (Category 2D) the motor must be protected by an
enclosure (according to EN50281-1-1 or according to
IEC61241-1: Ex tD). Group II motors are marked with a temperature.
• The motor over temperature signal supplied to the drive must be a
normally closed contact (open during over temperature condition)
compatible with the digital (logic) input circuitry of the drive. If multiple
sensors are required in the motor, the connection at the drive must be the
resultant of all required contacts wired in series.
• Refer to all product markings for additional cautions that may apply.
• Typical motor markings are contained on a motor certification nameplate
similar to the sample below.
FLAMEPROOF Exd ENCLOSURE

EExd I/IIB Tamb C to C
II 2 G/D 0518
I M2 Sira ATEX
MFG. BY ROCKWELL AUTOMATION
Drive Wiring Important: ATEX certification of this drive requires that two separate
inputs be configured to monitor a normally closed over
temperature contact (or multiple contacts wired in series)
presented to the drive from the motor.
The first input must energize the SD1 input (terminals X5-1 & X5-2) on the
drive option board (20C-DG1). The second input must energize the SD2
input (terminals X5-3 & X5-4) on the option board. This option board must
be installed in the drive for ATEX applications. It is offered with 24V DC
input only. Both input signals are wired with respect to the drive's digital
input common when using a control board with 24V I/O. Refer to Figure
2.2 on page 2-3 for wiring examples. Motor supplied contacts must have
ratings compatible with the input circuit ratings and applied voltage level of
the drive.
Instructions for ATEX Approved PowerFlex 700H Drives in Group II Category (2) Applications with ATEX Approved Motors F-3
Table F.A Terminal Descriptions

Term. Blk. No. Signal Description
X5 1 SD1+ Isolated Disable input 1 +24V +/-20% 10... 15mA
2 SD1– Virtual GND 1
3 SD2+ Isolated Disable input 2 +24V +/-20% 10... 15mA
4 SD2– Virtual GND 2
ON OFF
X2 21 Digital Out 1 - N.C. Max. Resistive Load:

22 Digital Out 1 Common 240V ac / 30V dc - 1200VA, 150W
X10 Max. Current: 5A, Min. Load: 10mA
23 Digital Out 1 - N.O.
Max. Inductive Load:
X3 25 Digital Out 2 Common 240V ac / 30V dc - 8400VA, 105W
26 Digital Out 2 N.O. Max. Current: 3.5A, Min. Load: 10mA
X7 28 TI1+ Thermistor input: Rtrip ≥ 4.0 kΩ (PTC)
28 29
29 TI1–
25 26
X7
X3
21 22 23
1 2 3 4 X2
X5
Important: The drive will not run unless one of the following conditions is
met:
– A wire must be installed in the hardware thermistor input
(X7-28 and X7-29) and the thermistor short circuit
supervisor jumper X10 must be installed in the OFF
position.
OR
– A thermistor must be installed in the hardware thermistor

input (X7-28 and X7-29).
Figure 1 Wiring Example - Internal 24V Power Supply
PowerFlex 700H
Control Unit
Slot A
19 +24V DC
20 24V DC Common
Motor Micro
Over Temperature Slot B Controller
Sensor(s) 20C-DG1 Disable Option
1 SD1+ Hardware
Disable 1
2 SD1-
3 SD2+
Hardware
4 SD2- Disable 2
28 TI1+
29 TI1-
PowerFlex 700H
Power Unit
Configuration The PowerFlex 700H drive can be configure in one of five ways when using
the 20C-DG1 option board, each resulting in the drive being put into a Gate
Disabled state when digital inputs are removed or the thermistor is out of
range.
1. Gate Disable Fault (59):
Configured by setting bit 10 “Gate Disable” of parameter 238 [Fault

Config1].
If both digital inputs open, the drive output will be disabled and the
motor will coast to a stop. The drive HIM will display fault 59 “Gate
Disable”.
When the condition is cleared, the fault can be reset and the drive can be
restarted.
If only one digital input opens, the drive output will be disabled and the
motor will coast to a stop. Refer to Table F.B on page F-6 for a
description of drive conditions and actions.
Instructions for ATEX Approved PowerFlex 700H Drives in Group II Category (2) Applications with ATEX Approved Motors F-5
2. Gate Disable Alarm (59):
Configured by setting bit 15 “Gate Disable” of parameter 259 [Alarm

Config1].
motor will coast to a stop. The drive HIM will display alarm 59 “Gate
Disable”.
When the condition is cleared, the alarm will automatically clear in 10

seconds and the drive can be restarted.
If only one digital input opens, the drive output will be disabled and the
motor will coast to a stop. Refer to Table F.B on page F-6 for a
description of drive conditions and actions.
3. Neither of the “Gate Disable” bits, 10 in parameter 238 [Fault Config1]

or 15 in parameter 259 [Alarm Config1], are set.
motor will coast to a stop. No fault or alarm indication will be given, but
the Gate Disable status can be seen in bit 0 “Gate Disable” of parameter
359 [20C-DG1 Status].
When the condition is cleared, the drive can be restarted after 3 seconds.
If only one digital input opens, the drive will be disabled and the motor
will coast to a stop. Refer to Table F.B on page F-6 for a description of
drive conditions and actions.
4. Both “Gate Disable” bits, 10 in [Fault Config1] and 15 in [Alarm

Config1], are set:
The Gate Disable fault takes precedence.
5. Thermistor Input:
If the thermistor input goes out of range, the drive output will be disabled
and the motor will coast to a stop. The drive will display fault 60 “Hrdwr
Therm” on the drive HIM.
When the condition is cleared, the fault can be reset and the drive can be
restarted. This configuration requires that the two digital inputs remain
closed to function.
Removing the 20C-DG1 During maintenance or service there may be a need to remove the 20C-DG1
Option Board option board.
The drive is designed to generate a non-resettable fault F10 “System Fault”

if the option board is removed. The operator must manually change
parameter 358 [20C-DG1 Remove] to 1- “Remove” and then back to 0 -
“Ready” to clear and acknowledge the fault.
Once maintenance or service is completed and the 20C-DG1 option card

has been reinstalled, the drive will recognize the option card on power-up.
Verify Operation At regular intervals during the life of the machine check the protective
system for proper operation. Both channels shall be verified using the table
below. How frequently the protective system is checked is dependent on the
safety analysis of the machine section controlled by the drive.
Table F.B Gate Disable Status and Verification
Drive In Drive In Drive In
Gate Disable Gate Disable Gate Disable Drive Able
Protective System Status State State State To Run
Channel Operation
SD1 - terminals X5-1 & X5-2 Bit 3 = 1 Bit 3 = 0 Bit 3 = 1 Bit 3 = 0
Par 359 [20C-DG1 Status], No Power Power Applied No Power Power Applied
bit 3 “No Enable CH1” Applied Applied
SD2 - terminals X5-3 & X5-4 Bit 4 = 1 Bit 4 = 1 Bit 4 = 0 Bit 4 = 0
Par 359 [20C-DG1 Status], No Power No Power Power Applied Power Applied
bit 4 “No Enable CH2” Applied Applied
Description For Verification
PowerFlex 700H Drive Output Output Output Output
Status Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled
Par 359 [20C-DG1 Status], Bit 0 = 1 Bit 2 = 1 Bit 2 = 1 Bit 0 = 0
Bit 0 “Gate Disable” Bit 15 = 1 Bit 15 = 1
or Bits 2 “Unexp In Pro” and
15 “Unexp HW Pro”
Fault or Alarm F59 “Gate F10 “System F10 “System None
Disable” (Fault Fault” Fault”
or Alarm Based
on drive set up)
Index
Numerics Auto/Manual
Control 2-11
20C-DG1 option board
Modes 2-10
configuration F-4
description of use F-1 Auxiliary 3-16, 4-10
operation F-6 Auxiliary Power Supply
terminal descriptions F-3 Power Supply 3-16, 4-10
wiring example F-4
B
A Bipolar Inputs 2-1, 3-1, 4-1
AC Input Bus Capacitors, Discharging P-5
Circuit Breakers A-13 Bus Overvoltage Trip
Ground 1-3 700H,700S A-1
Line Fuses A-13 Bus Undervoltage Shutoff/Fault
AC Input Overvoltage Trip 700H,700S A-1
700H,700S A-1
AC Input Undervoltage Trip
700H,700S A-1
C
AC Input Voltage Tolerance Cable Entry Plate
700H,700S A-2 SHLD Terminal 1-3
AC Supply Cable Trays 1-6
Source 1-1 Cables, Power
Unbalanced 1-1 Armored 1-5
Ungrounded 1-1 Insulation 1-4
Accel/Decel Separation 1-4
700H,700S A-3 Shielded 1-4, 1-5
Type 1-4
Actual Short Circuit Rating
Unshielded 1-4
700H,700S A-2
Capacitors
Agency Certification A-1
Bus, Discharging P-5
Altitude Rating
Carrier Frequency
700H,700S A-2
700H,700S A-3
Ambient Temperature
CE
Frame 10 7-2
Conformity 1-7
Frame 11 8-2
Requirements 1-8
Frame 12 9-2
Frame 13 10-2 Charging the MCCB Motor
Operators-Frame 14 11-26
Frame 14 11-2
Frame 9 6-2 Circuit Breaker DIP Switch Settings-Frame
14 11-25
Armored Cable 1-5
Circuit Breakers
ATEX
Closing-Frame 14 11-27
drive wiring F-2
Frame 14 11-24
ATEX approved
Resetting-Frame 14 11-28
drives F-1
Circuit Breakers, Input 1-4
motors F-1
Atmosphere
700H,700S A-2
Auto Mode 2-10
Index-2
Clearances, Mounting Dimensions

Frame 10 7-1 Frame 10 IP21 7-3
Frame 11 8-1 Frame 10 IP54 7-5
Frame 12 9-1 Frame 10 MCC 7-4
Frame 13 10-2 Frame 11 IP21 8-3
Frame 14 11-2 Frame 11 IP54 8-5
Frame 9 6-2 Frame 11 MCC 8-4
Common Mode Interference 2-1, 3-1, 4-1 Frame 12 IP21 9-3
Communications Frame 12 IP54 9-5
Logic Command Word 5-2 Frame 12 MCC 9-4
Logic Status Word 5-3 Frame 13 IP21 10-3
Programmable Controller Configurations Frame 13 IP54 10-4
5-2 Frame 14, 1500 A, IP21 11-5
Routing for Cabling - Frame 9 6-7 Frame 14, 1500 A, IP54 11-6
Conduit 1-6 Frame 14, DC Input, IP21 11-7
Frame 14, DC Input, IP54 11-8
Connecting Frame 14 Enclosure Sections
Frame 14, over 1500 A, IP21 11-3
B-15
Frame 14, over 1500 A, IP54 11-4
Contactors
Frame 9 6-3
Input 1-9
DIP Switch Settings
Output 1-9
Frame 14 Circuit Breakers 11-25
Control Logic Noise Immunity
Displacement Power Factor
700H,700S A-1
700H,700S A-2
Control Method
Distribution Systems
700H,700S A-3
Unbalanced 1-1
Control Wire 2-1, 3-1, 4-2
Ungrounded 1-1
Frame 9 6-7
DPI Port Locations 5-1
Control, Auto/Manual 2-11
Drive and Enclosure Weights
Conventions, Manual P-3
AC Input Frame 14 B-5
Cover, Opening 6-4 DC Input Frame 14 B-5
Current Limit Capability Frame 9 B-2
700H,700S A-3 Drive and MCC Enclosure Weights
Frames 10-12 B-6
D Drive and Rittal Enclosure Weights
Frames 10-13 B-4
Digital Wiring Examples 4-6
Drive Grounding 1-3
Drive Ratings A-13
Drive Weights
Frames 10-12, IP00 B-8
Frames 13, IP00 B-8
Frames 14, IP00 B-8
DriveLogix Specifications
Battery A-4
Flex I/O Connection A-4
Serial Cable A-4
User Available MemoryBase A-4
With Memory Expansion Board A-4
Index-3
E G
Earthing, see Grounding General Precautions P-5
Efficiency Ground Fault Trip
700H,700S A-2 700H,700S A-1
Electronic Motor Overload Protection Grounding
700H,700S A-3 Bus 1-3
EMC Conductor 1-3
Directive 1-7 Filter 1-3
Instructions 1-7 General 1-3
EMI/RFI Filter Grounding, RFI Filter 1-3 Impedance 1-3
Safety, PE 1-3
Enclosure Rating
Shields 1-3
Frame 10 7-2
Frame 11 8-2
Frame 12 9-2 H
Frame 13 10-2
Hardware Enable 2-6
Frame 14 11-2
Hardware Overcurrent Trip
Frame 9 6-2
700H,700S A-1
Encoder
Heat Sink Thermistor
inputs A-4
700H,700S A-1
maximum required input frequency A-4
PPR rating A-4 High Speed Inputs 4-7
voltage supply A-4 Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card
ESD, Static Discharge P-5 Wiring C-2
Hi-Resolution Stegmann Option A-4
Customer-I/O Plug (P1) - Hi Res A-4
F Encoder Voltage Supply A-4
Feedback Hi-Resolution Feedback A-4
Encoder Option A-4 specifications A-4
Filter, RFI 1-3
First Environment Installations 1-8 I
Frame 14 Circuit Breakers 11-24
Input Contactor
Frame 9 Brake Resistor Ratings 6-7 Start/Stop 1-9
Frame 9 DC Bus/Brake Connections 6-6 Input Devices
Frame Designations A-13 Circuit Breakers 1-4
Frequency Accuracy Analog Input Contactors 1-9
700H A-3 Fuses 1-4
Frequency Accuracy Digital Input Input Fusing 1-4
700H A-3 Input Phases
Frequency Control 700H,700S A-2
700H A-3 Input Potentiometer 2-7
Frequency Tolerance Input Power Conditioning 1-2
700H,700S A-2 Inputs
Fuses High Speed 4-7
Input 1-4 Intermittent Overload
Ratings A-13 700H,700S A-3
Index-4
L Non-operational Shock
700H,700S A-2
Lifting Drives
Frame 9 B-2
Frames 10-14 B-3 O
IP00 B-7
Opening the Cover 6-4
MCC Enclosures B-6
Operating ATEX approved drives and
Rittal Enclosures B-4
motors F-1
Line transients
Operating Modes 2-10
700H,700S A-1
Operating Temperature
Logic Command Word 5-2
Frame 10 7-2
Logic Control Ride-Thru Frame 11 8-2
700H,700S A-1 Frame 12 9-2
Logic Status Word 5-3, 5-5 Frame 13 10-2
Low Voltage Directive 1-7 Frame 14 11-2
Frame 9 6-2
Output Contactor
M
Start/Stop 1-9
Main Control Board
Output Devices
I/O Terminal Locations 3-3
Contactors 1-9
Main Control Board I/O Configuration
Output Frequency Range
Settings 3-16, 4-10
700H,700S A-3
Manual Conventions P-3
Output Voltage Range
Manual Mode 2-10
700H,700S A-3
Manual/Auto Control 2-11
Maximum Drive to Motor Power Ratio
700H,700S A-2 P
Maximum Short Circuit Rating PE Ground 1-3
700H,700S A-2 Ports, DPI Type 5-1
Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature Potentiometer, Wiring 2-7
without De-rating Power Cables/Wiring 1-4
700H,700S A-2 Power Conditioning, Input 1-2
MDI Power Ride-Thru
Recommended Cables E-2 700H,700S A-1
Minimum Mounting Clearances Power Terminal Block 6-5, 7-14, 8-15, 9-17,
Frame 10 7-1 10-14, 11-22, 11-23
Frame 11 8-1
Power Terminal Specifications
Frame 12 9-1
Frame 10 7-14
Frame 13 10-2
Frame 11 8-15
Frame 14 11-2
Frame 12 9-17
Frame 9 6-2
Frame 13 10-14
Modes, Auto/Manual 2-10 Frame 14 11-22
MOV 1-1 Frame 9 6-5
Precautions, General P-5
N Programmable Controller Configurations
5-2
Nominal Bus Voltage (Full Load)
Publications, Reference P-2
700H,700S A-1
Index-5
R Specifications
Agency Certification A-1
Ratings, Drive A-13
Control A-3
Recommended 3-1, 4-2, C-3
Drive Ratings A-13
Recommended Cables Electrical A-2
Cables C-3 Environment A-2
Reference Control 2-10 Protection A-1
Reference Material P-2 Speed Command Sources 2-10
Relative Humidity Speed Pot 2-7
700H,700S A-2 Speed Reference Control 2-10
Removing Cover 6-4 Speed Reference Selection 2-10
Repeated Start/Stop 1-9 Speed regulation with feedback
Resolver Feedback Option Card 700S A-3
PowerFlex 700S D-1 Speed regulation without feedback
Wiring D-3 700S A-3
Resolver Option A-4 Start/Stop, Repeated 1-9
excitation frequency A-4 Static Discharge, ESD P-5
excitation voltage A-4
Stop Modes
feedback voltage A-4
700H,700S A-3
maximum cable length A-4
operating frequency range A-4 Storage Temperature
700H,700S A-2
Supply Source 1-1
S SynchLink 3-18
Safety Ground 1-3 System Grounding 1-3
S-Curve Time
700H,700S A-3
Selectable Motor Control
T
700H,700S A-3 TB1 - Row B (Bottom) Terminals 3-7
Shielded Cables TB1 - Row T (Top) Terminals 3-4
Power 1-5 TB1 Terminals 4-4
SHLD Terminal 1-3 TB2 - Row T (Top) Terminals 3-10
Short Circuit Protection 1-4 TB2 Terminals 4-5
Short Circuit Trip Terminal Block
700H,700S A-1 Power 6-5, 7-14, 8-15, 9-17, 10-14,
Signal Wire 2-1, 3-1, 4-2 11-22, 11-23
Vector Control I/O 2-5
Sinking Input/Output 4-6
Wire Size
Software Overcurrent Trip
Encoder 2-3
700S A-1 I/O 2-3
Sound Power 6-5, 7-14, 8-15, 9-17,
700S A-2 10-14, 11-22
Sourcing Input/Output 4-6 Terminals
TB 4-5
TB1 4-4
the Multi-Device Interface Option
Wiring E-3
Torque Regulation with feedback
700S A-3
Index-6
Torque Regulation without feedback

700S A-3
U
Unbalanced/Ungrounded Supply 1-1
Unbalanced/Ungrounded/Resistive Ground
Supply 6-4
Unshielded Power Cables 1-4
V
Vector Control I/O Terminal Block 2-5
Vibration
700H,700S A-2
W
Web Sites, see WWW, World Wide Web
Wire
Control 2-1
Signal 2-1, 3-1, 4-2
Wiring
Frame 9 Control and Communication 6-7
Hardware Enable 2-6
Potentiometer 2-7
Power 1-4
the Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card
C-2
the Multi-Device Interface Option E-3
the Resolver Feedback Option Card D-3
Wiring Examples
Digital 4-6
TB1 - Row B (Bottom) 3-8
TB1 - Row T (Top) 3-5
TB2 - Row R (Top) 3-11
WWW, World Wide Web P-2
www.rockwellautomation.com
Power, Control and Information Solutions Headquarters

Americas: Rockwell Automation, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204-2496 USA,Tel: (1) 414.382.2000, Fax: (1) 414.382.4444
Europe/Middle East/Africa: Rockwell Automation, Vorstlaan/Boulevard du Souverain 36, 1170 Brussels, Belgium,Tel: (32) 2 663 0600, Fax: (32) 2 663 0640
Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, Level 14, Core F, Cyberport 3, 100 Cyberport Road, Hong Kong,Tel: (852) 2887 4788, Fax: (852) 2508 1846
Publication PFLEX-IN007D-EN-P – August 2008

Supersedes PFLEX-IN007C-EN-P - April 2006 Copyright © 2008 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in USA.

Powerflex 700s PDF

Uploaded by

Powerflex 700s PDF

Uploaded by

PowerFlex® 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive /

PowerFlex® 700S High Performance AC Drive

WARNING: Identifies information about practices or

Important: Identifies information that is critical for successful application and

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or

Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment

Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment

Summary of Manual Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-i

Chapter 1 General Installation Information

Chapter 2 PowerFlex® 700H Control Wiring

Chapter 5 Communication Options

Chapter 6 Frame 9 Installation

Chapter 7 Frame 10 Installation

Chapter 8 Frame 11 Installation

Chapter 9 Frame 12 Installation

Chapter 10 Frame 13 Installation

Chapter 11 Frame 14 Installation

Appendix B Lifting and Mounting Instructions

Appendix C PowerFlex 700S Hi-Resolution (Stegmann) Encoder Feedback Option

Appendix D PowerFlex 700S Resolver Feedback Option Card

Appendix E PowerFlex 700S Multi-Device Interface Option Card

Reference Materials Allen-Bradley publications are available on the internet at

The following manuals are recommended for general drive information:

The following manuals are recommended for detailed PowerFlex 700H

The following manuals are recommended for detailed PowerFlex 700S

The following manuals are recommended for detailed installation and

For Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support:

– Parameter Names will appear in [brackets].

– Display Text will appear in “quotes.” For example: “Enabled.”

• The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an

Identifying the Frame Size of the Drive

Cat No. 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN

Normal Duty Power

MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B) 2622381652

ATTENTION: The “adjust freq” portion of the bus regulator

General Installation Information

ATTENTION: To guard against personal injury and/or

If a system ground fault monitor (RCD) is to be used, only Type B

Unbalanced, Ungrounded or Resistive Grounded Distribution Systems

ATTENTION: PowerFlex 700H and 700S drives contain

Single-Phase Input Power

Input Power Conditioning

Output Power Conditioning

General Grounding Safety Ground - PE

Shield Termination - SHLD

RFI Filter Grounding

ATTENTION: Frame 9 - 14 PowerFlex drives do not provide

If you are installing... refer to:

Cable Types Acceptable for 200-690 Volt Installations

Consideration should be given to all of the general specifications dictated by

A good example of recommended cable is Belden® 295xx (xx determines

Because noise containment can be affected by incidental grounding of the

Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC

Interlocked armor is acceptable for shorter cable runs, but continuous

Best performance is achieved with three spaced ground conductors, but

CabIe Trays and Conduit

ATTENTION: To avoid a possible shock hazard caused by

EMC Instructions CE Conformity

CE Declarations of Conformity are available online at:

Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC)

EMC Directive (89/336/EEC)

Essential Requirements for CE Compliance

1. Standard PowerFlex 700H or 700S CE compatible Drive. For Frames 10

3. Grounding as described on page 1-3.

Restrict Motor Cable to 30 m (98 ft.)

Using Input/Output Input Contactor Precautions

Output Contactor Precaution

ATTENTION: To guard against drive damage when using

Common Bus/Precharge The following information must be read and understood:

• DC input drives do not have an internal precharge. Therefore:

– Precharge capability must be provided in the system to guard against

Important: Precharge circuitry is external to the drive.

DC Input Precharge Control Wiring

Table 1.D X50 Terminal Block Connections

Table 1.E X50 Terminal Block Specifications

Table 1.F External Relay Contact Ratings